Linked PDF

REPAIR
TN60DA TN60SA MANUAL

TN70DA TN70SA
TN75DA TN75SA
Section 21 -- Transmissions
87048069 4/04
TN60DA, TN60SA, TN70DA,
TN70SA, TN75DA, TN75SA
REPAIR MANUAL
CONTENTS
SECTION 00 -- GENERAL
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE
SECTION 18 -- CLUTCH
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS
SECTION 23 -- FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD
SECTION 25 -- FRONT AXLE (FWD)
SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE
SECTION 31 -- MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF
SECTION 33 -- BRAKING SYSTEM
SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

SECTION 41 -- STEERING
SECTION 44 -- AXLES AND WHEELS
SECTION 50 -- CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SECTION 55 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SECTION 90 -- PLATFORM, CAB, BODYWORK
The sections used through out all New Holland product Repair manuals
may not be used for each product. Each Repair manual will be made up of
one or several books. Each book will be labeled as to which sections are
in the overall Repair manual and which sections are in each book.
The sections listed above are the sections utilized for the TNDA and
TNSA Series Tractors.
366 -- 4/04 ã 2004 CNH America LLC

SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS-- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Transmission (16 x 16) Synchro-Command
CONTENTS
Section Description Page
21 000 Main data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Torque settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cross--sectional views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
21 118 10 Rear transmission/gearbox casing. Removal -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21 118 85 Gearbox transmission casing. Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
21 130 10 Gearbox control lever. Removal -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
21 130 11 Range gear control lever. Removal -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2 SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS-- CHAPTER 1
SHUTTLE UNIT MAIN DATA
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical type with spur

gearing, located between the
main clutch and the gearbox.
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hand lever located on left--hand
side of operator
GEARBOX AND RANGE GEAR MAIN DATA
Gearbox (Synchro-Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--speed constant mesh,
synchronized on all gears with
synchronized F/R shuttle shift.
Gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helical
Range gear (16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordinary gear train with 4 ranges
for a total of 16 speeds.
Thickness of gearbox driving shaft adjustment ring
(4, page 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.5 -- 0.75 -- 1.0 -- 1.25 -- 1.5 --
1.75 -- 2.0 -- 2.25
(in.) (0.19 -- 0.29 -- 0.39 -- 0.49 --
0.59 -- 0.68 -- 0.78 -- 0.88)
Thickness of gearbox driven shaft adjustment ring
(12, page 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.5 -- 0.75 -- 1.0 -- 1.25 -- 1.5 --
1.75 -- 2.0 -- 2.25
(in.) (0.19 -- 0.29 -- 0.39 -- 0.49 --
0.59 -- 0.68 -- 0.78 -- 0.88)
Springs for detent balls on gearbox and range gear control rods:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 42
(in.) (1.65)
-- length of springs under load of 75.5 to 83.3 N
(16.97 to 18.72 ft. lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 35
(in.) (1.37)
Springs (1, page 10) for gearbox and range gear control levers:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 44
(in.) (1.73)
-- length of springs under load of 31.4 to 35.3 N
(7.05 to 7.943 ft. lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 35
(in.) (1.37)
TORQUE SETTINGS
Tightening torque
PART (Refer to Figure 1) Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Sleeve cover retaining nuts (C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8 x 1.25 20 to 25 15 to 19
Gearbox driving and driven shafts bearing cover screws (C2) . . . M 10 x 1.25 84 to 93 62 to 69
Retaining bolts securing creeper clutch casing to rear
transmission/gearbox casing (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 117 to 129 87 to 96
Driven gear shaft locknut (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 32 x 1.5 280 to 309 207 to 228
Drive gear housing cover retaining screws (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 43 to 51 32 to 38
Pressure switches (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 51 to 72 38 to 54
Parking brake inspection cover, gearbox and range control relay
levers support cover retaining screws (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 43 to 51 32 to 38
Bolts or nuts securing creeper clutch casing to the engine (C8) . . M 12 x 1.25 117 to 129 87 to 96
TORQUE SETTINGS
C1 -- 20 to 25 Nm C3 -- 117 to 129 Nm C4 -- 280 to 309 Nm C5 -- 43 to 51 Nm

(15 to 19 ft. lbs.) (87 to 96 ft. lbs.) (206 to 228 ft. lbs.) (32 to 38 ft. lbs.)
25612 C2 -- 84 to 93 Nm
(62 to 69 ft. lbs.)
C6 -- 51 to 72 Nm
(38 to 54 ft. lbs.)
25614 C8 -- 117 to 129 Nm C7 -- 43 to 51 Nm

(87 to 96 ft. lbs.) 27928
(32 to 38 ft. lbs.)
1
TOOLS X 380001617 Pliers for gearbox shafts circlips.
380001618 Driving shaft installation guide.

Warning -- The operations described in this section 380001619 Driven shaft installation guide.
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi-
cated by an (X). 380001610 Adjuster handle (with 380001620
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- and 380001609).
sults, it is also necessary to use the recommended
380001620 Power take--off drive shaft seal
specific tools listed below and certain other tools,
splining tool (with 380001610).
which are to be made according to the drawings in-
cluded in this manual. 380001609 Power take--off drive shaft roller
bearings splining tool (with
List of specific tools required for the various oper- 380001610).
ations described in this Section.
50091 Tool for removal--installation final
380000227 Clutch casing lift hook. drives (see Section 27).
380000301 Rotating stand for overhaul oper- 380006006 Electronic Service Tool (use the Ca-
ations. libration and Diagnostic Unit as a
substitute).
X 380001614 Tool for gearbox driving and driven
shafts adjustment. 380006007 Electronic Service Tool less lap top.
380001615 Driving shaft rod for lifting unit. 380000282 Calibration and Diagnostic Unit
(use the Electronic Service Tool as
380001616 Driven shaft retaining tool. a substitute).
25618
2
Guide pin for re--fitting the gearbox in the casing (Mark part with no. 50158 -- Measurements in mm)
Make in C 40 material.
(1.57)
(11.81)
(9.84)
(7.87)
(1.96)
(1.57)
(3.54)
(.787) (.787)
26258
Tool to be made for lateral gear removal--installation, use with a part of 50091.
(Mark tool No. 50114 -- Measurement in mm [ins.])
Make in Fe 42 C material -- (*) Measurement according to hoist seat.

615 (24.21)
(1)
27940
Bracket to be made for gearbox overhaul on rotating stand

1. Rotating stand axis.
Make in Fe 42C material.
27941
5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X
X
25619 13 12 11 10 9
6
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of gearbox and gear range (16 + 16 Synchro-Command)
1. Seal. 8. Bevel pinion shaft.

2. Power take--off shaft support roller bearings. 9. Selector sleeve for low or medium--high speeds.
3. Shuttle control synchronizer. 10. Synchronizer for 1st and 2nd speed.
4. Gearbox driving gear clearance adjusting thickness. 11. Synchronizer for 3rd and 4th speed.
5. Power take--off shaft. 12. Gearbox driven shaft gear clearance adjusting
6. Gearbox driving gear. thickness.
7. Selector sleeve for high or medium--low speeds. 13. Gearbox driven shaft.
NOTE: On assembly apply sealing compound to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

Cross--sectional view of gearbox and range gear
1. Shuttle control external rod. 4. Gear selector internal rod.

2. Gear control external rod spring. 5. Shuttle selector internal rod.
3. Gear control external rod.
NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

25622
25623
8
Cross--sectional view of gearbox and range gear
1. Range gear control external rod spring. 5. Shuttle relay gear (reverse gear)
2. Range gear control external rod. 6. Detent ball and spring.
3. Shuttle control fork. 7. Lubricating oil external pipes.
4. Shuttle selector synchronizer. 8. Lubricating oil internal pipes.
NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

9
View of safety pin control
1. Gearbox clutch control pedal. 3. Gearbox clutch control external lever.

2. Gearbox clutch control cable. 4. Safety pin control cable.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Gearbox and Shuttle (Synchro-Command) The shuttle is a mechanical device making it possible
to obtain 16 forward gears and 16 reverse gears. It
4--speed gearbox with constant--mesh helical gears is controlled by a lever located on the cab platform to
controlled by two synchronizers. the left of the operator.
The range gear has cascade--type constant--mesh The shuttle is composed of a group of three spur
spur gears. gears: reverser driving gear, reverser driven gear
and intermediate gear, engagement is by means of
The range gear provides 4 gears (16 x 16 version).
a synchronizer located in the gear unit.
The gearbox and the range gears are controlled by
The shuttle is installed inside the clutch casing,
two independent levers located on the right--hand
between the clutch and the gearbox.
side of the operator.
Lubrication is by means of the oil in the rear
transmission/gearbox.
GEARBOX, GEAR RANGE AND SHUTTLE TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems Possible causes Remedies
Spontaneous disengagement of 1. Levers and relay rods Adjust correctly.

gearbox. incorrectly adjusted.
2. Control levers retaining Replace springs.

springs damaged.
3. Synchronizer teeth or Remove the transmission--gearbox

selection sleeves damaged. casing and replace the synchronizers
or the sleeves.
4. Engagement stroke Eliminate the cause and reset the

incomplete. complete stroke.
(continued overleaf)
GEARBOX, GEAR RANGE AND SHUTTLE TROUBLESHOOTING
(continued)
Problems Possible causes Remedies
Difficulty in engaging the gearbox. 1. External levers and relay rods Adjust correctly.
incorrectly adjusted.
2. Stiffness and/or partial seizure Check rod pivots and lubricate.

of external levers and relay
rods.
3. Main clutch drag. See Section 18.
4. Synchronizers or selection Remove the transmission--gearbox

sleeves damaged. casing and replace the synchronizers
or the sleeves.
5. Internal control elements do Overhaul the controls.

not slide freely: rods, forks and
sleeves.
Excessive noise in gearbox or 1. Internal components worn or Remove the transmission--gearbox

shuttle. defective. casing and replace the damaged
parts.
Op. 21 118 10 -- 21 118 12
REAR TRANSMISSION--GEARBOX CASING
Removal--Installation
DANGER
Lift and handle all heavy parts using suitable lifting
equipment
Make sure that the units or parts are supported by
means of suitable slings and hooks. Make sure that
no--one is standing in the vicinity of the load to be
lifted.
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 90 150 10 cab with platform
removal (see Section 90).
2. Carry out operation 23 101 26 transmission
shafts and guard removal (see Section 23).
3. Carry out operation 10 216 10 fuel tank removal
(see Section 10).
4. Lock the front wheels using chocks.
5. Remove the top link of the third point.
6. Using a hoist and sling (1) raise the rear part of
the tractor, position a fixed support stand under
the towing hook, then remove the right--hand (2) 27837
and left hand wheels. 10

7. Unscrew the plug and drain the oil from the rear
transmission casing (the prescribed quantity is
42 litres [11.09 gal]).
25628
11
8. Unscrew the stabilizer strut bracket retaining
bolts (1).
27840
12
9. Attach tool 50091 (1) and adapter 50114 (2) to
the lateral gear unit body.
27841
13
10. Position a hydraulic jack (2) under the gear unit,
unscrew the retaining bolts and, using the jack
(2), remove the right--hand gear unit (1) and the
spacer.
11. Detach and remove the vertical rods, complete
with the lower arms.
27842
14
12. Remove the pick--up bar, connect the pick--up
hitch hook (2), using a chain (1), to the hoist,
1 2
loosen the retaining bolts and detach the hook.
25627
15
13. Disconnect and remove the lift auxiliary control
valve pipe (1).
1 2
25449
16
14. Unscrew the retaining bolts and extract the Lift--
O--Matic control lever (1).
1
25450
17
15. Unscrew the retaining bolts on the lift (1).
Disconnect the power take--off speed sensor
connections, if necessary.
1
25451
18
16. Attach the lifting hook 380000227 (1) to the lift (2)
then raise and remove the lift.
1 2
25452
19
17. Unscrew and remove the filter pipes (1). Remove
the transmission gearbox pipes.
18. Disconnect the union (3) on the front differential
lock control pipes and loosen the clamp (where
installed).
27795
20
19. Unscrew the clamp (1) and detach the sleeve on
the oil intake pipes, unscrew the union (2) and re-
move the lift oil feed pipes, detach and remove
the two transmission gearbox casing pipes.
27796
21
20. Disconnect the brake control pipes (1) from the
brake block and the rear transmission casing and
remove.
21. Unscrew the union and the retaining bolt, then re-
move the pipes (2).
22
22. Disconnect the unions on the oil cooler pipes (1)
(where installed).
1
NOTE: The oil cooler is installed on models with
power shuttle transmissions, or the larger rated
hydraulic pumps.
25640
23
23. Disconnect the unions (2) and remove the pipes
(1 and 3). 1 2 3
24. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the cab
support bracket (on both sides).
25642
24
25. Position a fixed stand (1) under the engine.
1
27943
25
26. Screw on the four hooks (1) and, using a chain,
connect them to a hoist. Unscrew the retaining 1
bolts that secure the clutch casing to the engine.
Detach the engine together with the rear trans-
mission.
27944
26
27. Position the rear transmission--clutch unit on a
workbench. Unscrew the retaining bolts and
1
remove the services control valve (1).
25654
27
28. Extract the pin (3), detach the external lever (1),
unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the sup- 1 2
port (2), complete with control lever.
3
25655
28
29. Remove: the parking brake control lever (5), the
drive gear control oil union (4) and the electric 3
1 2
sensors (1, 2 and 3).
5
25656
29
30. Position two nylon slings (1) under the clutch cas-
ing (2) and attach to the hoist. Unscrew the re-
1 2
taining bolts that secure the clutch casing to the
transmission casing and remove.
31. To install the rear transmission--gearbox case,
proceed as follows.
WARNING
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes.
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
-- Before installing boxes, supports and covers, 25657

thoroughly clean and degrease the mating sur-
30
faces and apply a strip of sealing compound of
about 2 mm (0.0787 ins.) diameter as shown in
the diagram on page 30.
-- Respect the tightening torques prescribed on
page 2.
-- Install the clutch casing on the rear trans-
mission--gearbox case.
-- Install the electric sensors, the drive gear oil
union and the parking brake control external
lever.
-- Install the support complete with creeper--rev-
erser control lever, remembering to attach the
1
lever (2) to the bracket (1) and to insert the unit
positioned in a counter--clockwise direction, then
straighten--up the unit when it comes into contact 2
with the casing to facilitate the insertion of the
lever (2) in the relative teeth.
-- Install the services control valve.
27945
31
-- Install the rear transmission--gearbox case and -- Install the hitch--hook and pick--up bar.
clutch casing to the engine.
-- Connect the vertical rods to the lift arms.
-- Attach the cab mounting.
-- Connect all of the services control valve pipes. -- Install the brake disks, the differential axle shafts
and side gears.
-- Connect the brake and services control pipes.
-- Connect the heat exchanger pipes. -- Install the rear wheels and remove the support
stands.
-- Install the rear transmission--gearbox case oil in-
take pipes. -- Carry out operation 90 150 10 cab with platform
installation (see Section 90).
-- Connect all of the lateral filter and front differen-
tial lock control pipes (where installed). -- Carry out operation 23 101 26 transmission
-- Tighten the rear transmission--gearbox oil drain- shafts and guard installation (see Section 23).
age plug.
-- Carry out operation 10 216 10 fuel tank installa-
-- Assemble the hydraulic lift. tion (see Section 10).
-- Install the Lift--O--Matic control lever.
-- Fill up the rear transmission--gearbox casing
-- Assemble and connect the auxiliary control valve (see Section 00 for prescribed products and
support and pipes. quantities).
Op. 21 118 85
GEARBOX TRANSMISSION CASING
Disassembly-- Assembly
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands or
fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing
-- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Fix the gearbox--transmission casing to the rotat-

ing stand 380000301 using brackets 50157,
50160 (see pages 6 and 7).
2. Remove the drive gear casing, following the in-

structions in Section 23.
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the

cover (1) with the gearbox lever and gear unit.
4. Detach the power take--off control shaft following

25717
the instructions in Section 31.
32
5. Remove the parking brake casing cover and ex-

tract the circlip (1) that secures the parking brake
control lever.
25718
33
6. Extract the parking brake control lever (2) and re-
cover the sleeve--cam (1).
25721
34
7. Loosen the retaining bolt and remove the cover
(1).
25734
35
8. Remove the circlip (2) and recover the unit (1)
composed of the brake disk and the relative fric-
tion sectors.
25735
36
9. Install tool 380001615 (1) on the driving shaft and
lock in position, insert tool 380001616 (2) on the
gearbox driven shaft and tighten.
NOTE: If the gearbox in question is a standard fitting,

fit a M 12 x 1.25 x 40 screw together with a ∅ 12 x ∅
45 washer and 3 mm (.118 ins.) shim, instead of tool
380001616 (2).
25736
37
10. Remove the circlip from the front side of the cas-
ing and, using an extracting tool, extract the final
drive driven shaft and recover the driven gears
(1).
25737
38
11. Extract the lubrication pipe (1) from the gearbox.
25738
39
12. Remove the circlip (1) and the union (2), com-
plete with the lubrication pressure adjustment
valve.
25739
40
13. Unscrew the lubrication union (1) from the left--
hand side of the casing.
25740
41
14. Remove the union (2) and the lubrication sleeve
(1).
25741
42
15. Enlarge the circlip (1) that secures the gearbox
driving shaft.
25742
43
16. From the drive gear case, enlarge the circlip (1)
that secures the gearbox driven shaft.
25744
44
17. Unscrew the gearbox retaining bolts (1) and re-
move, using a hoist.
25743
45
18. Install tool 380001614 (2) in a vice and remove
the mobile part (1) of the tool.
25774
46
19. Install the gearbox unit to the tool 380001614 (1)
and install the mobile part (2) of the tool.
25775
47
20. Remove the pins (1) to free the gearbox control
forks (on one side).
25776
48
21. Extract the pins on the other side of the gearbox
and remove: the upper part (1) of the tool
380001614 with tool 380001615 (2) from the
driving shaft and the retaining tool 380001616
from the driven shaft.
25777
49
22. Remove the driving shaft (1) and the driven shaft
(2).
25778
50
23. From the opposite side, remove the rod stop ring
(2), extract and recover the reverser control fork
(1).
25779
51
24. Extract the circlip (1) and recover the
synchronizer (2).
25780
52
25. Unscrew the retaining bolt (2) and recover the pin
(3), relay gear (1) and relative bearings and
thrust washers.
25781
53
26. Enlarge the circlip (3) that secures the driven
gear (1) to the gearbox support (2) and remove
the gear (1).
25782
54
27. Enlarge the circlip (1) and extract the gearbox
driven shaft (2).
28. To install the transmission--gearbox casing, pro-

ceed as follows.
WARNING
25783
55
-- Before installing boxes, supports and covers,
thoroughly clean and degrease the mating sur-
faces and apply a strip of sealing compound of
about 2 mm (0.0787 ins.) diameter as shown in
the diagram on page 30.
-- Respect the tightening torques prescribed on

page 2.
-- Carry out the gearbox driven and driving shaft

adjustments noted on page 30.
-- Install the gearbox driving shaft on the relative

support.
-- Install the gearbox driven gear on the relative

support.
-- Install the reverse drive gear complete with thrust

washer, bearing and retaining bolt.
-- Assemble the synchronizer and circlip.
-- Install the reverser control rod, fork and stop cir-

clip.
-- Assemble the driven and driving shafts, the con-

trol forks and lock in position with tools
380001616 and 380001615 install the mobile
part of tool 380001614.
-- Install the control forks to the rods using the pins.
-- Detach the mobile part of the tool 380001614 and

remove the gearbox unit from the tool.
-- Install tools 380001618 and 380001619 (1) on

the driving shaft lock circlip and the driven shaft
lock circlip (respectively).
25784
56
-- Using a hoist, install the gearbox unit in the cas-
ing and remove the tools 380001618 (1) and
380001619 (the latter must be recovered from
the drive gear casing). Secure in position with the
bolts.
-- Install the lubrication union and sleeve.
-- Install the lubrication pressure adjustment valve,

complete with the union and circlip.
-- Assemble the lubrication pipes.

25785
-- Install the driven shaft and gears. 57
-- Remove tools 380001615 and 380001616 from

the driving and driven shafts.
-- Install the parking brake unit, comprising brake

disks and friction sectors.
-- Install the cover (1) by means of the bolt (2).
NOTE: Apply Loctite 242 thread locker to the thread

on bolt (2) and tighten to a torque setting of 19.6 Nm
(14 ft. lbs.).
-- Assemble the parking brake control lever, com-

plete with cam sleeve and circlip.
-- Install the parking brake cover.

25786
-- Assemble the power take--off control shaft, fol- 58

lowing the instructions in Section 31.
-- Install the cover with the gearbox control lever

and final drive.
-- Install the drive gear, following the instructions in

Section 23.
-- Detach the transmission--gearbox casing from

the rotating stand.
TRANSMISSION--GEARBOX CASING
Gearbox driving and driven shafts clearance
adjustment.
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
NOTE: When installed, ensure the driving and driven

shaft gears provide an axial clearance of 0.314 inch 25787
(0.8 mm) in order to guarantee correct synchronizer
operation. 59
1. Using tool 380001614 (1) clamped in the vice, at-

tach the gearbox support complete with the driv-
ing and driven shafts without the respective ad-
justment shims (4 and 12, page 8), install the
mobile part (2) on the tool.
2. Using a depth gauge, measure the distance (L)
between the top of the tool 380001614 (1) and
the circlip (3) on the driving shaft bearing.
3. Measure the distance (L1) between the top of the
tool 380001614 (1) and the circlip (2) on the
driven shaft bearing.
4. The adjustment shim (4, page 8) to fit on the driv-
ing shaft is given by:
S = L -- 46.5 -- 1.0
where
L = measurement read
46.5 = theoretical measurement of
tool 380001614
1.0 = synchronizer operating clearance.
Round down the value.
25788
5. The adjustment shim (12, page 8) to install on the
driven shaft is given by: 60
S1 = L1 -- 36 -- 1.0
L1 = measurement read
36 = theoretical measurement of tool 380001614
Round down the value
Example:
L = 1.92 inch (48.8 mm) measurement read
L1 = 14.88 inch (37.8 mm) measurement read
46.5 = theoretical measurement of
tool 380001614
36 = theoretical measurement of tool 380001614
S = 48.8 -- 46.5 -- 1.0 = 0.51 inch (1.3 mm) (adjust-
ment shim 4, page 8).
S1 = 37.8 -- 36 -- 1.0 = 0.314 inch (0.8 mm) (ad-
justment shim 12, page 8).
The adjustment shims are listed on page 2.
Round down the value.
27152
61
Sealing compound application diagram for transmission--gear box casing

Op. 21 130 10
GEARBOX CONTROL LEVER
Removal -- Installation
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the four retaining bolts and the guard

retaining flange.
2. Raise the guard (2), remove the gearbox control

lever retaining bolt and the gearbox control lever
(1).
3. To install the gearbox control lever, proceed as

follows.
WARNING
27654
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. 62
-- Install the gearbox control lever (1, fig 62), com-

plete with guard (2) on the control sleeve.
-- Install the lever retaining bolt to the control

sleeve, lower the guard, then install the four
guard retaining flange retaining bolts.
Op. 21 130 11
RANGE GEAR CONTROL LEVER
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the four retaining bolts and the guard

retaining flange.
2. Raise the guard (2), remove the range control

lever retaining bolt and the range control lever
(1).
27653
3. To install the range control lever, proceed as fol- 63

lows.
WARNING
-- Install the range control lever (1, fig 63), com-

plete with guard (2) on the control sleeve.
-- Install the lever retaining bolt to the control

sleeve, lower the guard, then install the four
guard retaining flange retaining bolts.
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS -- CHAPTER 2 1
Chapter 2 -- Power Shuttle Transmission (16 x 16) Synchro-Command
CONTENT
21 000 Main data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cross--sectional views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
21 118 85 Transmission--Gearbox. Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
21 134 46 Power shuttle control valve. Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21 134 70 A + B Clutch valve solenoids. Removal -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
21 154 60 Dump valve solenoid. Removal -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
21 154 34 Clutch casing. Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS -- CHAPTER 2
SHUTTLE MAIN DATA
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power shuttle type with spur
gearing, located between the
PTO clutch and the gearbox.
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hand lever
located on the left--hand side of
the steering wheel
GEARBOX MAIN DATA

Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--speed constant mesh,
synchronised on all gears
Gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helical
Reduction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordinary gear train with 4 ranges
for a total of 16 speeds.
-- gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spur gears
Gearbox and range gear operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . independent, by means of lever
located on right--hand side of
operator
For missing data see Chapter 1, page 2.
POWER SHUTTLE MAIN DATA

Number of driven plates in each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 6
Thickness of driven plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0787 to 0.0818
(2.00 to 2.08)
Driven plates material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sintered
Number of driving plates in each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 6
Thickness of driving plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0787 to 0.0866
(2.00 -- 2.20)
Driving plates material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steel
Thickness of clutch assembly under a load of 1600 N (359.57 lbs.) in. (mm) 0.9803 to 0.9881
(24.9 to 25.1) (1)
Clutch piston return spring:
-- number of springs for each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 7
-- spring free height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.1299 (3.30)
-- spring height under a load of 1255 N (282.19 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.1031 (2.62)
Hydraulic control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounted on the outer

left--hand side of the
transmission--rear--gearbox
casing, comprising. 3 control
solenoid valves.
Power Shuttle and services transmission working pressure . . . . . psi (bar) 227 (15.7)
By--pass valve spring (4, fig. 8) by--pass valve:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.397 (35.5)
-- length of spring under load of 37.2 to 41.2 N (8.37 to 9.25 lbs) in. (mm) 1.003 (25.5)
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . paper cartridge
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fixed to the pump housing
on suction side
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the same as used for the
hydrostatic steering system
(see Section 41)
(1) Value to obtain by varying the thickness of the driving plates.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PARTS TO BE TIGHTENED Thread
Nm ft-lb
For missing data see Chapter 1, page 2
Solenoid valve retaining nut (C1) (•) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 1.7 to 2.8 1.2 to 2.0
Solenoid valve spool retaining bolt (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 14.9 to 20.3 10 to 15
Solenoid valve spool retaining bolts (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 47 to 54 35 to 40
Solenoid valve retaining nut (C4) (•) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 5.4 to 8.1 4 to 6

(•) Apply 1 or 2 drops of LOCTITE 542 before tightening
1
TOOLS X 380001617 Pliers for gearbox shafts circlips.
380001618 Driving shaft installation guide.

Warning -- The operations described in this Section 380001619 Driven shaft installation guide.
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi-
cated by an (X). 380001610 Adjuster handle (with 380001620
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- and 380001609).
sults, it is also necessary to use the recommended
380001620 Power take--off drive shaft seal
specific tools listed below and certain other tools,
splining tool (with 380001610).
which are to be made according to the drawings in-
cluded in this manual. 380001609 Power take--off drive shaft roller
bearings splining tool (with
List of specific tools required for the various oper- 380001610).
ations described in this Section.
50091 Tool for removal--installing final
380000227 Clutch casing lift hook. drives (see Section 27).
380000301 Rotating stand for overhaul oper- 380006006 Electronic Service Tool (use the Ca-
ations. libration and Diagnostic Unit as a
substitute).
X 380001614 Tool for gearbox driving and driven
shafts adjustment. 380006007 Electronic Service Tool less lap top.
380001615 Driving shaft rod for lifting unit. 380000282 Calibration and Diagnostic Unit
(use the Electronic Service Tool as
380001616 Driven shaft retaining tool. a substitute).
(.275)
(.787) (.590)
25618
2
Guide pin for installing the gearbox in the casing (Mark part with no. 50158 -- Measurements in mm)
Make in C 40 material.
27941
3

615 (24.21)
(1)
27940

(Mark part No. 50157 -- Measurement in mm [ins.])
1. Rotating stand axis.
5
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of Power Shuttle gearbox (16 + 16 version)
1. Forward gear control clutch piston. 7. Reverse drive shaft.

2. Forward gear control clutch. 8. Reverse driven shaft.
3. Piston return Belleville washer. 9. Reverse gear clutch control piping.
4. Reverse gear control clutch. 10. Forward gear clutch control piping.
5. Reverse gear control clutch piston. 11. Lubrication control pipes.
6. Forward gear drive shaft.
NOTE: For missing data see Chapter 1.

7 6 5
Cross--sectional views of Power Shuttle gearbox
1. Power Shuttle control valve. 6. Reverse return gear.

2. Gear control internal rod. 7. Roller bearing.
3. Gear control external lever. 8. Dump solenoid valve.
4. Pin. 9. Operating pressure testing plugs.
5. Pin retaining bolt (4).
5
4
MDE0067A
Power Shuttle control valve.
1. Reverse clutch control solenoid valve. 4. Reverse gears clutch working pressure control plug.
2. Forward clutch control solenoid valve. 5. Forward gears clutch working pressure control plug.
3. Dump solenoid valve.
CLUTCHES CONTROL PRESSURE TEST
Unscrew plug (4) or (5) on the clutch to be tested and If the pressure is incorrect adjust the shims (3, fig. 8),
connect a pressure gauge from kit 380000240 to the increase if the pressure is low and decrease if too
relative hole. high.
Start the engine and check the pressure (see page 2).
1 2 3
27804A
6 5
Cross--sectional view of services control valve
1. Four wheel drive release solenoid valve. 4. Cooler by-pass valve spring.
2. Spring for services control oil pressure adjustment 5. Cooler by-pass valve.
valve. 6. Services control pressure adjustment valve.
3. Services control oil pressure adjustment shims.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Gears
4--speed gearbox with constant--mesh helical gears

controlled by two synchronizers.
The range gear has cascade--type constant--mesh

spur gears.
The range gear provides 4 gear ranges (16 + 16 ver-

sion).
The gearbox and the range gears are controlled by

two independent levers located on the right--hand
side of the operator.
Gear reversal is obtained by means of the lever (1)

located on the left--hand side of the steering wheel.
It is not necessary to press the clutch pedal, but the
engine rpm and tractor speed must be reduced.
Lubrication is by means of the oil in the rear trans-

mission/gearbox.
Power Shuttle unit
The Power Shuttle gearbox is controlled by two

multi--disk clutches in an oil bath. 9
This provides hydraulic control of 4 gears for each
range, both forward and in reverse.
Gear and range selection is performed by pressing

the clutch pedal and operating the control levers lo-
cated on the right--hand side of the operator.
The front clutch controls the forward gears, the rear

clutch controls the reverse gears.
GEARBOX AND GEAR RANGE TROUBLESHOOTING
See Chapter 1, pages 12 and 13.

Op. 21 118 85
TRANSMISSION--GEARBOX
Disassembly--Assembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
1. Carry out operation 21 118 10 rear transmission--
gearbox casing removal (see Chapter 1).
2. Unscrew the retaining bolts and recover the ser-

vices control valve (1).
1
25654
10
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and detach the Pow-
er Shuttle (1) control valve.
4. Attach the transmission--gearbox casing on the

rotating stand 380000301 using brackets 50160
(see pages 5 and 6).
27087
11
5. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) on the clutch con-
trol pipes (2).
27088
12
6. Remove the clutch control pipes (1) by means of
rotation.
27089
13
7. Unscrew the unions (1 and 2) on the clutch con-
trol pipes and recover the internal unions.
27090
14
8. Loosen the shuttle control pin (1).
9. Complete the gearbox removal operations by fol-

lowing the instructions in Chapter 1.
10. To install the unit, carry out the disassembly op-

erations in reverse order, following the instruc-
tions in Chapter 1.
27091
15
Op. 21 134 46
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care. Do not put your
hands or fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety
clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
1. Unscrew the nut (1) and extract the solenoid

27111
valve (2).
16
2. Unscrew the solenoid valve pin (1).
3. Repeat operations 3 and 4 with solenoid valve
(2).
27112
17
4. Unscrew the nut (2) and extract the solenoid
valve (1).
27113
18
6. Repeat operations 4 and 5 with solenoid valves
(2 and 3).
27114
19
7. Remove the circlip (1).
27115
20
8. Remove the plug (1) and recover the shuttle con-
trol pin (2).
27116
21
9. Remove the switch (1).
10. To install the Power Shuttle control valve, pro-

ceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Respect the tightening torque values prescribed

on page 3.
27117
-- Install the switch.
22
-- Assemble the control pin, plug and circlip.
-- Install the pins and relative solenoid valves then,

after having applied 1 or 2 drops of Loctite 542,
tighten the nuts.
Op. 21 134 70
A + B CLUTCH VALVE SOLENOIDS
WARNING
Proceed as follows.

(see Section 10).
2. Disconnect the solenoid valve connection (1).
23
3. Loosen the nut and remove the solenoid valve

(1).
24
5. To install the control valve solenoid, proceed as

follows.
WARNING
-- Screw the pin on the solenoid valve.
-- Install and secure the solenoid valve.
-- Connect the electrical connection. 25

tion (see Section 10).
Op. 21 154 60
DUMP VALVE SOLENOID
WARNING
Proceed as follows.

(see Section 10).
2. Disconnect the solenoid valve connection (1)

and unscrew the retaining nut.
26
3. Remove the solenoid valve (1).
27
5. To install the control valve solenoid, proceed as

follows.
WARNING
-- Screw the pin on the solenoid valve.
-- Install and secure the solenoid valve.
-- Connect the electrical connection. 28

tion (see Section 10).
Op. 21 154 34
CLUTCH CASING
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 21 118 12 rear transmission--

gearbox casing removal (see Chapter 1).
2. Attach the clutch casing to the rotating stand

380000301 using brackets 50157, and 50160.

clutch control pipes (1). 27092
29
4. Unscrew the retaining bolt and recover the

sleeve (1), fork (2) lever (3) and spring (4).
27093
30
5. Unscrew the rear bearing support retaining bolts
(1).
27094
31
6. Unscrew the front bearing support retaining bolts
(1).
27095
32
7. Insert tool 380001621 (1) on the clutch unit (2),
secure in position and remove, using a hoist.
27096
33
8. Position the clutch unit (1) on a workbench, re-
move tool 380001621 (2) and separate the unit
into two parts.
27097
34
sleeve (1) for the power take--off clutch engage-
ment sleeve.
27098
35
10. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the front bear-
ing support (2).
27100
36
11. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the shaft (2).
27101
37
12. Remove the circlip (1) that secures the clutch
disk assembly.
27102
38
13. Extract the gear (1) and recover the clutch disk
assembly (2) and the relative springs (3).
27103
39
14. Using an extractor (1) and tool 380000291 (2)
compress the Belleville washer (3), remove the
sto ring (4) and recover the washer and piston.
27104
40
15. Remove the sto ring (1) and extract the clutch
body (2).
27105
41
16. Remove the front bearing support (1).
271106
42
17. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the bearing
(2).
18. To install the clutch casing, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Respect the tightening torque values prescribed

on page 3.
27107
43
-- Assemble the front bearing and circlip on the -- Unite the two clutch units and lock in position with
shaft. tool 380001621.
-- Install the front bearing support. -- Insert the clutch unit in the casing.
-- Insert the clutch body and stop ring. -- Install the front bearing support by means of the
bolts.
-- Insert the piston and install the Belleville washer
and circlip. -- Install the rear bearing support by means of the
bolts.
-- Assemble the clutch disk assembly complete
with springs and gear. -- Assemble the lever, spring, fork and the power
take--off clutch engagement sleeve.
-- Assemble the other clutch, as described previ-
ously. -- Install the clutch control pipes.
-- Install the shaft and stop ring. -- Detach the casing from the rotating stand.
-- Assemble the front bearing support and circlip. -- Carry out operation 21 118 12 rear transmission--
gearbox casing installation (see Chapter 1).
-- Install the sleeve for the power take--off clutch
engagement sleeve.
Chapter 3 -- Power Shuttle Transmission Calibration,

Faults and Diagnostics
CONTENT

Fault Codes Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description of Systems (ECM and CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Calibration and Diagnostics Unit (CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Calibration and Diagnostic Unit Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
H1 -- Clutches A and B Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
H2 -- Clutches A and B Calibration Values Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
H3 -- System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
H4 -- Power Shuttle Hardware and Software
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
H5 -- Control Switch Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
H6 -- Clutch A Fill Time Modification and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
H7 -- Clutch B Fill Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
H8 -- Erasure of Data Stored in the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
HA -- Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and Status Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Replacement and Clutch
Pedal Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
HC -- Transmission Oil Temperature Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HD -- HI/LO Synchronizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HE -- Gear Change Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Description of Systems (ECM and EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Electronic Service Tool (EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Downloading the Latest Software into
TNDA, TNSA Series Tractor Power Shuttle Control
Module with the Electronic Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting the Electronic Service Tool
(EST) to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
H1 -- Clutches A and B Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
H2 -- Clutches A and B Calibration Values Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
H3 -- System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
H4 -- Power Shuttle Hardware and Software
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
H5 -- Control Switch Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
H6 -- Clutch A Fill Time Modification and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
H7 -- Clutch B Fill Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
H8 -- Erasure of Data Stored in the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
HA -- Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and Status Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Replacement and Clutch
Pedal Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
HC -- Transmission Oil Temperature Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
HD -- HI/LO Synchronizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
HE -- Gear Change Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Power Shuttle (16 x 16) Electronic Control Module
Input/Output Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
FAULT CODES INDICATION
In the event of an electrical or electronic fault, any
eventual anomalous conditions are indicated by the
illumination of an indicator lamp (1).
FAULTS CODE DECODING

The indicator (1) identifies the error code in six
phases:
1. 5 flashes in rapid succession to indicate
imminent transmission of the error code;
2. 2 second pause; 26304
3. n... flashes to indicate the first figure of the fault 1

code;
4. 1 second pause;
5. n... flashes to indicate the second figure of the
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.
The control unit only indicates one code at a time,
giving priority to the most serious faults.
If a higher priority fault occurs whilst a lower priority
fault is being displayed, the display sequence of
higher priorities will wait until the sequence in
progress ends, before becoming active.
To check for the presence of other codes the fault
must be eliminated, allowing the control unit to
proceed to the following fault.
IMPORTANT: If a fault disables the lift control

function, the corresponding code will take
precedence over other codes that were previously
indicated; these codes will be saved by the system.
-- Example of the interpretation of fault code number 21 --
1st phase 2nd phase 3rd phase 4th phase 5th phase 6th phase
FFFFF pause FF pause F pause
code
second digit
transmission 2s first digit 2 1s 3s
1
warning
fault code composition
p
21
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
(ECM and CDU)
The TNDA and TNSA series tractors have various
electro-hydraulic components for controlling various
systems. One of these systems includes the Power
Shuttle transmission. Each of these systems has an
Electronic Control Module (ECM) for commanding, A B
operating, and troubleshooting certain input and
output sensors. Because of this, an operating
software program is required to monitor and control
the system. A diagnostic software program is used to
indicate when and where a system fault occurs. The C
software program is in a tool called the
Calibhration/Diagnostic Unit (CDU, tool 380000282). 2
The CDU has three operating buttons. The “H Menu”
button (A) is used to scroll through different menus
and for initial access to the calibration and diagnostic
systems. The “up arrow” (B) and “down arrow” (C)
are used to scroll through list in each menu, start
calibrations, and saving/erasing.
The ECM has two modes of “Auto Self-Diagnostic”
functions to detect abnormal operating conditions in
the ECM itself or in any circuits the ECM controls or
monitors. The ECM will detect failures or abnormal
conditions and once detected will switch to error logic
and failure management logic circuitry in the ECM.
The first mode is when the key switch (1) is turned
from the “OFF” (A) position to the “RUN” position (B)
when starting the tractor. This self-diagnosis could
continue up to 30 seconds if abnormal conditions are
detected.
The second mode is real-time self-diagnosis while
the tractor is running, “RUN” posistion (B).
3
If the ECM detects a system error or abnormal
condition in either mode, the ECM error logic will
signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp (1) on
the instrument panel to flash a code. The failure
management logic will signal error codes according
to priority.
26304
4
AUTOMATIC SELF-DIAGNOSIS (ECM)
The ECM automatically does a self-diagnosis of the

different system parts when the key switch (1) is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “RUN” position
(B) when starting the tractor. The configuration of
these parts is already stored in the non-volatile
memory.
During the self-diagnosis period the trasmission
status light (1, fig. 6) will remain on. The
self-diagnosis process could continue for up to 30
seconds if abnormal conditions are detected.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to move the tractor prior 1

to the completion of self diagnosis the self diagnosis
will be terminated, the transmission status light will be
turned off and error codes may not be displayed.
Once the self-diagnosis is completed and if there is

an abnormal condition or failure in one or more of the
ECM controlled systems, the ECM will cause the
alarm lamp (1, fig. 7) on the instrument panel to flash
a code, or the transmission status light (1, fig. 6) will
begin flashing alerting the operator that there is a
problem.
6
The ECM also performs real-time self diagnosis of
system components while the tractor is running,
“RUN” position (B). The ECM will perform this at
regular intervals to check for possible system failures
or abnormal conditions.
condition while the tractor is running, the ECM error
logic will signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp
on the instrument panel to flash a code, alerting the
operator that there is a problem. The failure
management logic will signal error codes according 1
to their priority.
If an error with lower priority occurs while an error of
higher priority is already being signaled, the lower 7
priority error will be stored until the error of higher
priority has been removed.
If an error of higher priority occurs while an error of
lower priority is being signaled, the higher priority
error will be displayed after the lower priority error
sequence has been displayed.
ECM -- FIRST START--UP
(Self Configuration)
The ECM will require configuration when any one of

the following circumstances has occurred.
-- At the end of the production line.
-- Following ECM replacement.
-- Following erasure of the Non--Volatile memory

(NVM) (see H8 MENU).
-- Following manual configuration NONE (see H3

MENU). 8
Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the

engine.
Indicator (1) (fig. 9) will be illuminated
(non--flashing), after a while the indicator will flash to
repeat the recognised configuration code -- i.e.: rapid
flashing, followed by 1 flash.
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 8) to OFF for a few seconds:

the configuration is now saved in the
Non--Volatile memory (NVM).
9
TRANSMISSION DISABLED INDICATOR

LIGHT 1
The ECM is programmed with a fail-safe mode,
which will disable and cause the transmission to go
into neutral in the unlikely event that a malfunction
should occur. When the transmission is disabled the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) example in the
instrument panel will begin flashing or may be
illuminated.
There are basically three situations in which the

transmission can be disabled: 1) during start up, 2)
during operation with fault codes stored in the ECM,
3) disabled with no stored error codes.
10
Disabled during start-up
During the start up self-diagnosis period the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) will remain on
for a few (2-5) seconds (the self diagnosis period
could continue for up to 30 seconds if abnormal
conditions are detected).
If a fault is detected during start up, the ECM will

signal an error code causing the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 11) to flash a code alerting the operator there is
a problem. The transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) 1
will begin flashing, and the transmission will be
disabled.
Depending on the type of fault, the Power Shuttle 11

may not function until the clutch pedal is cycled, the
Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled, or until after the
problem is corrected.
NOTE: If the start up diagnostics is interrupted, the

Power Shuttle may not function until the clutch pedal
or the Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled after start
up.
Disabled with error codes stored
During normal operation if a critical error occurs the
transmission will be disabled and the error code will
be signaled through the alarm lamp (1) (fig. 11) on
the instrument panel. The transmission status light
(1) (fig. 10) may or may not begin flashing.
Disabled with no error codes stored
If during normal operation, when the FNR lever is
placed in either the forward or reverse position, or
while moving, the tractor transmission becomes
disabled, the status light (1) (fig. 10) begins flashing,
and no error codes are signaled on the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 12).
12
The tractor will not move until either the FNR lever (1)
or the clutch pedal is cycled.
This condition can be caused by either operator fault F
(not seated, gear/range levers not properly engaged, R
incorrect starting sequence) or system fault (seat
switch faulty, gear/range lever position switches 1
mis-adjusted/faulty, and alternator W+ wire).
NOTE: See electrical Section of this manual for
proper operation of operator’s presence circuit for
seat switch.
13
DIAGNOSIS DURING OPERATION 2 -- Priority Numerical value.
Diagnosis during operation is in real time and checks 3 -- Detection Group of conditions creating
for the eventual presence of anomalous conditions at the fault.
regular intervals, whilst the functional software is 4 -- Effects The eventual effect of the
working. fault on the system.
The diagnosis should check all conditions shown 5 -- Correction The condition that corrects
under the DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS the fault, if possible, and the
headings. functional change of the
system after this correction.
FAULT DETECTION AND ANOMALOUS 6 -- Not displayed during calibration.
CONDITIONS MANAGEMENT LOGIC 7 -- Not displayed in Cab Test mode: this mode is
accessed by sending a series of “commands” to the
The start--up and functional code also includes the
ECM, through the serial connection.
faults detection and anomalous conditions
management logic. The TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
This logic processes the faults information provided heading contains the definitions of the system errors,
by the diagnostics (start--up diagnosis and diagnosis subdivided into the aforementioned fields.
during operation) and functional bodies, indicating
the condition of the system, in order to detect “system
faults” and “anomalous conditions”. MULTIPLE ANOMALOUS CONDITIONS --
The faults detection and anomalous conditions PRIORITY
management logic also diagnoses ECM and external
In the event of multiple anomalous conditions, as
circuit anomalies, where the hardware can not be
explained in the following heading, the display logic
diagnosed directly; i.e. it checks the coherence of the
uses the “Priority” field to establish the code to
functional bodies and their configuration.
display. Unless otherwise specified, the resulting
Each time the faults logic detects a “system error” or multiple anomalous condition effect/condition is
an “anomalous condition”, the fault code will be provided by superimposing each individual
displayed, it creates a fault which is processed by the effect/correction; in the event of incompatibility
faults buffer logic in the non--volatile memory, the between the different corrections, the correction
faults display logic and the anomalous conditions linked with the highest priority fault is used.
management logic.
The anomalous conditions management logic
considers the effect of the faults that effect tractor FAULT DISPLAY LOGIC
operation.
The logic also manages the correction procedure for Introduction
a fault condition. As soon as a problem is detected, it must be
Each fault is described using the following fields: displayed by the indicator lamp (1, fig. 12).
1 -- Fault code Numerical value.
CALIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTICS UNIT a) short to +12.
(CDU) b) short to ground or open circuit.
The Calibration and Diagnostics Unit (CDU) c) nominal range deviation.
indicates fault conditions relative to the HH menu, 12VF KEY SUPPLY.
e.g.: calibration Uxx codes.
12VD CLUTCH DRIVERS SUPPLY.
Other fault conditions, unless masked by the “cab
a) short to ground or open circuit.
tester mode” or “calibration mode”, are flashed on the
illuminated signal lamp (1, fig. 12). b) nominal range deviation.
DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS INPUT DIAGNOSTICS
ECM and relative circuits fault. Anomalous condition description and reset
The unit must be provided with a watchdog for ECM For each of the following inputs, apart from when
anomalous conditions). there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous
The length of the software cycle should be 10 ms, conditions must be diagnosed (independently of the
whereas the watchdog pause should be 16.5 ms ECM status).
(longer pauses are not recommended). This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms
(longer pauses are not recommended).
Reaction to fault. AN1 Clutch pedal potentiometer.
At start--up, and in the event of microprocessor AN2 Forward gear lever switch.
anomalous conditions, none of the solenoid valves
AN8 Not used.
are enabled.
AN9 Not used.
Follow--up reaction. AN10 Not used.
In the event of an anomalous condition, the AN11 Not used.
watchdog and reset circuit must guarantee that the AN12 Not used.
ECM does not excite the solenoid valves.
-- short to 5V or 12V.
-- short to ground or circuit open.
POWER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS
AN3 Not used.
For each ulterior current supply, apart from when
there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous AN5 Not used.
conditions must be diagnosed, independently of the AN6 Not used.
ECM status). AN4 Oil temperature sensor.
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms -- short to ground.
(longer pauses are not recommended).
-- short to 5V or 12V or circuit open.
AN7 Fuse 20.
Anomalous condition description and reset
5V SENSORS SUPPLY. -- short to ground or circuit open.
8V SENSORS SUPPLY.
POWER SHUTTLE FAULT CODE PRIORITY
CODES FAULT PRIORITY CORRECTION EFFECT
11 CPDL_POT_LO_DISABLING_ERR 14 SL Dis
11 CPDL_POT_LO_ERR 75′ Fixed Lim
12 CPDL_POT_HI_DISABLING_ERR 15 SL Dis
12 CPDL_POT_HI_ERR 74′ Fixed Lim
13 UD_SW_ON_ERR 67 Auto None
14 C1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 22 CP/SL Dis
14 C1_SW_HI_ERR 83′ Fixed Mod
15 C1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 23 CP/SL Dis
15 C1_SW_LO_ERR 84′ Fixed Mod
16 G1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 24 CP/SL Dis
16 G1_SW_HI_ERR 85′ Fixed Mod
17 G1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 25 CP/SL Dis
17 G1_SW_LO_ERR 86′ Fixed Mod
18 CREEPER_ENG_SW_HI_ERR 47 Fixed Mod
19 CREEPER_ENG_SW_LO_ERR 48 Fixed Mod
21 CH_HARN_ERR 1 Fixed Crit.Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_DIS_ERR 39 CP/SL Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_ERR 97′ Fixed Lim
23 SOL_B_SHORT_DIS_ERR 37 CP/SL Dis
23 SOL_B_SHORT_ERR 95′ Fixed Lim
24 CL_UNCAL_ERR 100 Fixed Mod
26 ERPM_HI_ERR 65 Fixed Mod
27 ERPM_LO_ERR 66 Fixed Mod
28 B_CL_UNCAL_ERR 101 Fixed Mod
29 A_CL_UNCAL_ERR 102 Fixed Mod
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 31 CP/SL Dis
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_ERR 90′ Fixed Lim
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 33 CP/SL Dis
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_ERR 92′ Fixed Lim
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_DIS_ERR 35 CP/SL Dis
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_ERR 98′ Fixed Lim
35 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_12V_ERR 8 Fixed Crit.Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 34 CP/SL Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 99′ Fixed Lim
37 CL_SW_OC_ERR 13 CP/SL Dis
38 SOL_B_SHORT_12V_ERR 9 Fixed Crit.Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 36 CP/SL Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 94′ Fixed Lim
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 38 CP/SL Dis
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 96′ Fixed Lim
42 SOL_A_SHORT_12V_ERR 11 Fixed Crit.Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 18 CP/SL Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 81′ Fixed Lim
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 21 CP/SL Dis
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 82′ Fixed Lim
46 FUSE_20_ERR 51 Auto Lim
47 CL_SW_HI_ERR 55 Fixed Mod
48 CL_SW_LO_ERR 56 Fixed None
49 WHLSPD_SNR_HI_ERR 63 Fixed Mod
51 TEMP_SNDR_OC_ERR 53 Auto Mod
52 TEMP_SNDR_SC_ERR 54 Auto Mod
53 V5_VREF_FAILED_HIGH 6 Fixed Crit.Dis
54 V5_VREF_FAILED_LOW 7 Fixed Crit.Dis
55 FORWARD_SW_HI_ERR 57 Auto None
56 FORWARD_SW_LO_ERR 58 Auto None
57 REVERSE_SW_HI_ERR 61 Auto None
58 REVERSE_SW_LO_ERR 62 Auto None
59 FNR_SW_DISAGREE_ERR 43 Auto Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 16 CP/SL Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 76′ Fixed Lim
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 17 CP/SL Dis
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 77′ Fixed Lim
63 SYNCRO_HL_ENG_ERR 40 SL/HI Dis
64 SYNCRO_SHTL_ENG_ERR 41 SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 32 CP/SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 91′ Fixed Lim
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 28 CP/SL Dis
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 89′ Fixed Lim
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 27 CP/SL Dis
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_ERR 87′ Fixed Lim
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 26 CP/SL Dis
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_ERR 88′ Fixed Lim
69 WHLSPD_SNRLO_ERR 64 Fixed Mod
71 SYNC_START_UP_INIT_ERROR 93 Auto Dis
72 SYNC_POPPED_OUT_ERR 42 CP/SL Dis
73 V_12VF_FAILED_HI 2 Fixed Crit.Dis
74 V_12VF_FAILED_LOW 3 Fixed Crit.Dis
76 NVM_RD_ERR 68 Fixed Mod
81 PRESS_SW_OC_ERR 49 Fixed Mod
82 PRESS_SW_SC_ERR 50 Fixed Mod
SYMBOLS USED
CORRECTION column
Fixed the fault continues to be displayed (NO RESET).

Auto the fault is no longer displayed when the conditions that generated the fault are no longer present
(RESET).
SL the fault is no longer displayed by using the Shuttle (SL) and/or the clutch pedal (CP).
CP the fault is no longer displayed using the clutch pedal (CP).
Hi the fault is no longer displayed pressing the pushbutton (Hi).
Combinations of the aforementioned symbols are possible.
EFFECT column
Dis. Crit. the gears are critically disabled by this fault.

This fault can only be deleted by switching off the ECM.
Dis. the gears are disabled, the “correction” column explains how the gears
can be enabled.
LIM the fault condition limits tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that disable certain functions.
Mod. the fault condition effects tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that make the tractor move slowly or abruptly.
CODE column
Contains the numerical code to display.
PRIORITY column
The apostrophe indicates that the CODE has already been used by a previously listed fault condition.
CALIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTIC UNIT USE
Specific remote diagnosis operations can be carried
out with the Calibration and Diagnosis Unit (CDU).
Errors code
If the Faults Detection Logic reads a fault condition,
the code will flash on the indicator. In this manner, the
fault condition can be displayed whilst in HH mode.
During calibration, certain faults may be masked.
The CDU 380000282 gives access to the following

menus:
H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION

H2 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION VALUES
DISPLAY
H3 -- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
H4 -- SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS
H6 -- CLUTCH A FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H7 -- CLUTCH B FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H8 -- DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE
NON--VOLATILE MEMORY (EEPROM)
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS
HA -- CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION AND SWITCH
DISPLAY
HC -- TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
HD -- SHUTTLE SYNCHRONIZER POSITION
NOT ACCESSIBLE ON TNDA OR TNSA
MODELS
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENT
HF -- FAULTS SAVED IN THE ECM
NON--VOLATILE MEMORY
NOTE: The tractor can only be used in the H6, H7,

H9, HA, HC and HE menus.
Whilst other menus are being used the transmission
is disabled.
If tractor movement is detected whilst these menus
are in use, the menu will be interrupted and
transmission will be enabled; to re--enter the HH
MENU, stop the tractor and press key (1, fig. 17).
To exit from an active MENU, press key (1, fig. 17) to
return to the HH MENU.
If the menu allows tractor movement, stop the tractor
(speed = 0).
HH MENU ACCESS
WARNING
Put all gearshift levers in their neutral positions.
This is required because some H Menus allow
operation of the transmission.
1. Release the retainer screws, 1, and pull the left

instrument panel guard, 2, off.
14
2. Identify the diagnostic unit connector(s), 1, under
the instrument panel. The connectors are color
coded for identification purposes. Use the
following list to determine the correct connector:
• Black: Power Shuttle Transmission
• Red: FWD Engagement
15
3. Turn the switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect the

CDU device 380000282 to the black diagnosis
connector.
NOTE: Align the outer left and right pins between the
male and female connector. They have a flat side to
orient the connector.
4. Turn the key switch to the “ON” position (B) (see
fig. 16) while pressing down the “H Menu” button
(1), (see fig. 17). If the instrument panel is not on,
consult Section 55, electrical diagrams as to
which fuse provides power to the instrument
panel.
If the warning lights display an error code, but the
CDU does not light up and the H Menus can not 16
be accessed again, consult the electrical
diagrams as to which fuse provides power to the
diagnostic tool.
5. After a few seconds, the CDU display (2) shows
“H MENU”. Now the H Menu button can be
released. If the button was not held long enough
the CDU may display “NO COMM”. This also
occurs if the “H Menu” button is not held while
turning the key switch to the “ON” position.
6. Select the required H menu by pressing the H
MENU key (1) the correct number of times to
display the relative code on the display (2), e.g.:
once to access H1, five times to access H5, etc.
Each time key (1) is pressed, the display (2) H5
shows the H code obtained, i.e.: H1, H2 etc.
Remember that after the HF MENU, the count
restarts from HH.
H
After a brief pause (2 seconds) the ECM enters MENU
the procedure of the selected menu. 1 2 3 4
Explanations of the relative menus begin on
page 18. MDB0751A
If the operator presses key (1) while an H menu

is in use, the menu is abandoned and the display 17
(2) returns to the HH selection phase.
If the H code does not correspond with an active
H menu, the display (2) returns to HH and waits
for an ulterior selection.
7. Turn the key switch (1) to the “off” position (A) and
wait approximately 5 seconds to store the
revised data. The CDU can be re-entered by
repeating step #4.
NOTE: The functional software is always disabled

when the CDU is connected to the diagnosis
connection, unless otherwise specifically noted.
Consult the description of the individual HH menus in
order to understand why the functional software is
disabled.
18
WARNING
Park the tractor on level ground in an
unobstructed area (in case of sudden
movement).
Engage the handbrake, switch off all electrical

switches and the air conditioning system, if on.
Set the Shuttle control lever in neutral, the

hydraulic lift lower arms down, the remote
control valve levers in neutral and switch off the
engine.
Put safety wedges under the front and rear

wheels.
Check that the transmission oil temperature is

between 20 to 50 °C (68 to 122 °C).
Unless otherwise specified, the levers:

- Shuttle;
- Gear shift;
- Range gear;
- Creeper;
are in the NEUTRAL position.

H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B
CALIBRATION
The H1menu provides access to Power Shuttle clutches
(A) and (B) calibration, reducing the engine speed when
the clutches start engaging. The ECM reads engine
RPM from the alternator to accomplish this.
The calibration of the clutches is necessary when the
following has occurred:
• Poor transmission performance
• Solenoid valve has been replaced
• Erasure of non--volatile memory in the ECM
(using the H8 menu)
• ECM has been replaced
• After initial break-in period -- first 50 hrs.
Use the following procedure to calibrate the clutches.
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF”
position (A) and connect the CDU to the Power
Shuttle ECM as described previously in this
manual.
19
2. While holding the “HMENU” button (1) on the
CDU display (2), turn the key to the “START”
position (C).
3. After the tractor has gone through self diagnosis
and has started, release the “HMENU” button (1). H1
“HMENU” should appear on the CDU display (2).
4. Press the “HMENU” button (1) once. “H1” should
appear on the CDU display (2). After a few H
seconds, “CALIBR” will appear momentarily on MENU
the CDU display (2) and then change to the 1 2 3 4
transmission fluid temperature.
5. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set and MDB0751A
increase the engine speed to 1300 + 100 RPM.
20
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).
21
7. Place the range lever (2) into the highest range.
8. Place the gear selection lever into first gear (1).
22
9. Position the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1)to the
forward position.
10. Slowly release the clutch pedal, making sure the F
tractor does not move. R
1
23
CLUTCH A CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the diagnostic instrument displays an “U”
error code during the calibration procedure, refer to
the table at the end of this procedure in this Section
to identify and remedy the problem. An example of an
error code would be U21 (engine speed lower than
1200 RPM).
1. Press and hold the down arrow (1) on the CDU.
Initially the CDU will display “STAB.RPM” (2),
then the initial value of the setting in milli--amps
(mA) (3).
2. Continue holding the down arrow (1) until the
engine speed reduces about 50 RPM and the STAB. RPM
final calibration setting flashes continuously (3).
An example would be: A=286mA
NOTE: The tractor may lurch, but not move. This
value and lurch represent the point the energized 1
PWM solenoid has provided enough hydraulic fluid 2
to engage the clutch pack. Hydraulic pressure at this
point is not full but approximately 40 -- 50 psi. 10006107
24
3. Release the down arrow (1) and the CDU display
should display the transmission oil temperature.
A = 286 mA
10006107
25
CLUTCH B CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the diagnostic instrument displays an “U”
error code during the calibration procedure, refer to
the table at the end of this procedure in this Section
to identify and remedy the problem. An example of an
error code would be U21 (engine speed lower than
1200 RPM).
4. Press and hold the up arrow (1) on the CDU.
Initially the CDU will display “STAB.RPM” (2),
then the initial value of the setting in milli--amps 1
(mA) (3).
5. Continue holding the up arrow (1) until the engine
speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final STAB. RPM
calibration setting flashes continuously (3). An
example would be: A=286mA
value and lurch represent the point the energized 2
PWM solenoid has provided enough hydraulic fluid
point is not full but approximately 45 -- 50 psi. 10006107
26
6. Release the up arrow (1) and the CDU display
should display the transmission oil temperature.
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position (A) to
store the clutch values.
NOTE: If the tractor operation is abrupt after
calibrating the clutches, refer to the H6 and H7 A = 286 mA
menus to adjust the fill times for the clutches.
NOTE: As clutch components wear, the clutch
calibration and fill times will need adjusted
3
accordingly.
NOTE: Transmission output speed, engine RPM,
clutch pedal position, gear and range lever positions 10006107
are constantly monitored. Calibration can go on only
if the tractor is stationary, the Power Shuttle FNR 27
lever is not in neutral, the main (C1) and range (G1)
shift levers are not in neutral, and the clutch pedal is
released. If calibration conditions have not been met,
this will be displayed and the associated error code
will be flashed on the instrument panel. If the fault
condition is relevant to calibration, an “U” code will be
displayed on the CDU.
Calibration Error Codes

Code Cause Remedy
U19 Transmission oil temperature lower Drive tractor to increase transmission oil temperature
than 10_ C (50_ F) ∗
U20 Incorrect starting procedure Press and release clutch pedal
U21 Engine speed lower than 1200 RPM Increase engine speed
U22 Engine speed over 1400 RPM Decrease engine speed
U23 Power Shuttle control lever in neutral Place Power Shuttle control lever into the forward or
reverse position as required.
U24 Range selector in neutral Place range lever into highest range
U25 Gear selector in neutral Place gear lever into first gear
U26 Clutch pedal not fully raised Release clutch pedal fully
U27 Clutch pack (B) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U28 Clutch pack (B) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary. Test reverse solenoid hydraulic pressure
circuit.
U29 Clutch pack (A) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U30 Clutch pack (A) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U31 Tractor is moving Engage parking brake
U32 Hi/Lo synchronizer not engaged Check synchronizer using the HD menu
(*) Between 10_ C (50_ F) and 20_ C (68_ F) the

CDU display will show “COLD OIL”. However, when
continuing to hold the up arrow or the down arrow
key, the calibration will continue.
VALUES DISPLAY
The H2 menu displays the calibration values
expressed in milli-amps (mA), for the “A” and “B”
hydraulic clutch solenoid valves. These values were
obtained by the ECM during the clutch calibration in
the H1 menu.
Use the following procedure to obtain the values:
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” (A)
position and connect the CDU to the Power
Shuttle ECM, as described previously in this
manual.
2. While holding the “HMENU” button on the CDU,
turn the key switch to the “ON” (B) position.
3. Once the tractor has gone through diagnostics,
“HHMENU” should appear on the display.
Release the “HMENU” button.
26083
28
4. Press the “HMENU” button (2) twice. “H2” should
appear on the CDU.
NOTE: The display automatically shows the “A” 3
clutch value.
2 H2
10006107
29
5. Press the up arrow (3) on the CDU to obtain the
value for the “B” clutch. The current stored value,
in mA, will be displayed. An example would be
B=290 mA. 3
6. Press the down arrow (4) on the CDU to obtain
a value for the “A” clutch. The current stored 2 B = 290 mA
value, expressed in mA, will be displayed. An
example would be: A=286 mA.
7. The mA range for each clutch must be between 4
230 mA and 480 mA (for either clutch).
8. Turn the key switch (1) to the “OFF” (A) position
or enter another menu by pressing the “HMENU”
button on the diagnostic instrument. 10006107
30
The H3 menu displays the tractor’s system
configuration, stored in the non-volatile memory
(NVM) menu after a tractor with a new ECM has been
initially started up. H3 also allows the transmission to
be configured manually.
1. Put the key switch (1) into the “OFF” position (A)
and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle ECM
connector, as described previously in this
manual.
2. Hold the “HMENU” button (2) on the CDU and
turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
31
3. After the tractor has gone through the
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the display.
Release the “HMENU” button (2).
4. Press the “HMENU” button (2) three times. “H3”
will appear on the CDU display (3). After several
seconds the configuration stored will be 2 H3
displayed. One of the following configurations
will be shown:
10006107
32
• Pshuttle - Power Shuttle Transmission
• Hi/Lo (does not apply to TNDA or TNSA)
- Power Shuttle Transmission with Hi/Lo
(32X16)
• Hi/Lo CR (does not apply to TNDA or
TNSA) - Power Shuttle Transmission with Hi/ 2 PSHUTTLE
Lo and Creeper (44X16)
• None - No configuration stored in memory,
occurs with the ECM replacement or erasure
of non-volatile memory (H8). Only detected 3
at first power on of ECM.
10006107
33
NOTE: It is possible to select any configuration
available. Selection of the wrong configuration can
cause Error Codes to be displayed through the PS
Alarm lamp or causes tractor malfunctions. Selection
of the “NONE” will cause the ECM to conduct a
self-configuration at the next start-up. The self-con-
figuration check always gets performed when a
different ECM is installed, after H8 is cleared, and
whenever H3 configuration is set to “NONE”. The
ECM performs the self test by sending a signal out
through the harness and receives acknowledgement
of signs in from various sensors, switches, and
solenoids.
5. To quit the menu without modifying the
configuration, press the “HMENU” button (2) on
the CDU.
4
6. If the configuration displayed does not match the
configuration the tractor is equipped with, the
configuration can be modified manually by 2 PSHUTTLE
pressing the up arrow (4) until the correct
configuration is shown on the CDU.
7. When the correct configuration is shown, press 5
3
and hold the down arrow (5). The display (3) on
the CDU will start this sequence: “STORE 5s,
STORE 4s, STORE 3s, STORE 2s, STORE 1s, 10006107
STORED”. This shows the new configuration is
stored in the ECM. After the configuration has 34
been stored, release the down arrow (5) on the
CDU.
NOTE: If the down arrow (5) is released during the
store countdown, the latest changes to configuration
will not be stored and the CDU displays the previous
setting.
8. Turn the key switch (1) to the “OFF” position (A)

and wait for at least two seconds to save the
configuration into the non-volatile memory.
H4 - POWER SHUTTLE HARDWARE AND

SOFTWARE REVISION LEVELS
The H4 menu will display the revision level of the
software that is installed in the ECM. Use the
following procedure to display the revision levels:
1. Make sure the key switch is in the “OFF” (A)

Shuttle ECM connector, as described previously
in this manual.
26083
35
4. Press the “HMENU” button four times. “H4”
should appear on the instrument display.
H4
5. The instrument will display the following
information in a 8 second interval. Each
parameter will be displayed for 2 seconds and
then revert back to “HH MENU”.
• Product Identity (MA)
• Software Revision Level: (Release [00.01]))
10006107
• Hardware Level: (02.00)
• Manufacturer -- set valves (40) 36
NOTE: It is also a good practice to remove the
instrument panel in order to record the ECM part
number, module serial number and batch number.
6. When finished viewing, press the “HMENU”
button to enter another menu or turn the key
switch to the “OFF” (A) position.
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCH DIAGNOSIS

The H5 menu is for checking the status of the circuits
and control switches that are connected to the ECM.
The H5 menu allows inspection of each one of these
circuits for continuity and to check for transitions on
ECM inputs, either switch or analogue type, for
diagnostic purposes.
With reference to analogue inputs, “transition”

means that a certain threshold was exceeded. The
letter “d” and a number are displayed each time a
transition occurs.
The number displayed indicates in which circuit the
transition occurred. If same circuit has two
subsequent transitions, the message displayed
changes to “d0” when the second transition takes
place.
This routine also checks for Forward, Neutral and
Reverse button inconsistencies. The neutral button
is not tested separately through its own “d” number,
as the operator cannot induce neutral safety switch
transition in any manner without inducing it at the
same time on the Forward or Reverse buttons.
If the shuttle lever is moved with the clutch pedal
released, the neutral safety switch will originate a
transition also on the 12VD line, which is used to test
the clutch pedal button.
Following interaction among these buttons:
• The Forward and Reverse buttons should be
tested with the clutch pedal applied (down).
• The clutch pedal button should be tested with the
shuttle lever engaged (not in neutral).
• If the keystart switch is turned to the engine-on
position with the shuttle lever in neutral and the
clutch pedal down (normal start-up procedure),
a button inconsistency error may occur (exclu-
sively in this diagnostic mode).
When a clutch pedal button transition occurs (pedal
is released), clutch pedal potentiometer calibration
values are checked and also button adjustment is
checked. Proceed as follows to guarantee adequate
checking.
NOTE: It is important to follow each of the
procedures as described, otherwise the display on
the diagnostic instrument will not show the correct
reading.

manual.
26083
37
NOTE: The clutch pedal should be up (released).
4. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) in the F

forward position.
R
38
5. Press the “HMENU” button five times. “H5”
should appear on the CDU display.
NOTE: d0 is always displayed first when H5 menu is
entered. To obtain the readings in the following
procedures the clutch pedal must be released and
the FNR lever must be in forward before entering H5 d0
menu.
6. Observe the display on the CDU while slowly

depressing the clutch pedal (at least two
seconds). The status of the potentiometer and
clutch switch is displayed. The display should
10006107
appear like this as the clutch pedal is being
depressed: d0 > d20 > d21 . d21 is displayed 39
when the clutch pedal “clicks” on the depressed
movement. If the clutch pedal is completely
released, the display will return to d20.
7. With the clutch pedal depressed, take the Power
Shuttle lever (1) from forward and return the lever
to neutral. The display will change from d21 > F
d22. Leave the tractor in neutral for a few R
seconds while observing the display. The display
should continue to show d22 ; this helps to verify
Error Code 59.
8. While the clutch pedal is depressed, place the
Power Shuttle lever into reverse. The display
should change from d22 to d23.
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal while observing
the display on the CDU. The display should
change from reverse, d23, to the clutch switch,
d21, and then to the potentiometer, d20. This 40
verifies conditions related to Error Codes 11, 12,
47, and 48.
10. Place the gear selector lever (1) from neutral into
any gear. The CDU display should show d33.
Removing the gear selector lever from a gear
should cause a second transition in that circuit
and the display should show d0.
NOTE: If the gear lever is in gear when H5 menu is
entered, or another control or switch is moved while
the gear lever is engaged the readings may be
opposite from step 10.
41
11. Place the range control lever (1) from the neutral
position to any range. The CDU should display
1
d34.
NOTE: If any other control or switch is moved during
the shift, the “d” values may occur opposite as listed
above.
12. Stand up from the operator’s seat. This should

cause the CDU display to change to d36. Sitting
down on the seat will cause a second transition
and the display to change back to d0.
42
13. For d29 (Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor),
d30 (Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor), and
d35 (Transmission Wheel Speed Sensor) to be
displayed on the CDU, a transition must be
manually induced. This can be accomplished by
viewing the CDU as the sensor is unplugged and
plugged back together.
SUMMARY OF SWITCH AND ANALOGUE INPUTS
d. code Switch and Analogue Inputs

d.0 When H5 menu is first entered; and when a second transition occurs on the same switch
d.20 Clutch pedal potentiometer
d.21 Clutch pedal switch (Power Shuttle FNR lever must be in forward or reverse)
d.22 Power Shuttle FNR lever in forward position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.23 Power Shuttle FNR lever in reverse position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.29 Hydraulic oil temperature circuit (unplugged versus plugged in)
d.30 Hydraulic oil pressure circuit (engine off versus engine started)
d.32 Fuse supply to CDU (tool will not work if fuse is removed)
d.33 Main (C1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.34 Range (G1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.35 Wheel speed detection circuit (tractor moving)
d.36 Operator’s seat presence switch (stand-up)
H5 - MENU QUICK REFERENCE TEST PROCEDURE
Action Description Display
1 Enter the H5 menu with the clutch pedal released and the Shuttle lever in Forward. d0
Slowly press the clutch pedal (time > 2 seconds). The potentiometer status d20
2
change should be read first, followed by the pushbutton. d21
With the clutch pedal lowered, move the Shuttle lever from the Forward position
3
to neutral, to check the Forward selection pushbutton. d22
Leave the Shuttle lever in the neutral position for at least 1 second to check for
4
disagreement between the Forward/Neutral/Reverse pushbuttons (E59). (d22)
Holding down the clutch pedal, move the Shuttle lever from the neutral position to
5
Reverse, to check the relative pushbutton. d23
Release the clutch pedal slowly (time > 2 seconds).

The pushbutton status change should be read first. d21
6 Clutch pedal calibration is checked (E10, E11 and E12).
Clutch pedal pushbutton adjustment is checked (E47 and E48).
Finally, the potentiometer status change is read. d20
13 Carry out a status change on the oil temperature sensor. d29
15 Carry out a status change on the gear lever pushbutton. d33
16 Carry out a status change on the Range lever pushbutton. d34
17 Carry out a status change on the pressure switch. d30
18 Carry out a status change on the operator seat switch. d36

H6 - CLUTCH (A) FILL TIME

MODIFICATION AND DISPLAY
IMPORTANT: The transmission is functional during
this menu.
The H6 menu displays the (A) clutch filling time and
allows change of the clutch filling time, if necessary.
(Full open solenoid valve for maximum flow of oil to
fill up clutch pack. The solenoid coil will receive full
voltage.)
If adjusting the clutch filling time due to poor or abrupt
tractor take off when the clutch is released, use the
following guidelines.
• Increase the clutch filling time if the tractor “jerks”
abruptly and then takes off.
• Decrease the clutch filling time if the tractor
“jerks”, then hesitates, and then takes off.
IMPORTANT: For best results, tractor should be
properly ballasted or configured according to what
tractor will be used for. Vehicle mass will affect shift
characteristics.
calibration and clutch fill time will need to be adjusted
accordingly.
manual.
turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
43
4. Press the “HMENU” button six times. “H6” should
appear on the CDU display.
A = 80ms
5. After a few seconds, the CDU will display a value
in milli-seconds (1/1000 second). For example,
the display may read: A=80ms. The clutch filling
time must be between 30 - 150 milli-seconds.
6. To change the filling time, be sure the Power
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and use the up
and down buttons to change the clutch filling time 10006107
by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default setting 44
is 70 ms.
IMPORTANT: The clutch must be fully released to
properly store the clutch filling time in the tractor
ECM.
7. With the clutch released, place the Power Shuttle
control lever in the forward position to store the
new value.
8. Return the Power Shuttle control lever to the
neutral position.
9. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to
save the clutch fill time in the ECM.
NOTE: Fill time can also be adjusted by operating the
CDU while the tractor is running. The value is
changed and saved in the same manner as stated,
but the tractor is running, so ensure the gears are
neutral and parking brake set.
10. Disconnect the CDU from the tractor and test the
new clutch filling time by test driving the tractor in
a variety of situations. Adjust the clutch fill time
again, if necessary.
NOTE: The first fill time after adjustment may not be
reliable. Fill time should be tried several times to
accurately evaluate performance.
H7 - CLUTCH (B) FILL TIME

this menu.
The H7 menu displays the (B) clutch filling time and
characteristics.
accordingly.
1. Make sure the key switch is in the “OFF” position

and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle ECM,
as described previously in this manual.
turn the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
45
4. Press the “HMENU” button seven times. “H7”
should appear on the CDU.
5. After a few seconds, the CDU will display a value
the display may read: B=80ms. The clutch filling
time must be between 30 - 150 milli-seconds. B = 80ms

Shuttle control lever is in neutral and use the up
and down buttons to change the clutch filling time
by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default setting
is 70 ms.
IMPORTANT: The clutch must be fully released to 10006107
properly store the clutch filling time into the tractor 46
ECM.

clutch fill time.
neutral position.
CDU while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the CDU from the tractor and test the
H8 - ERASURE OF DATA STORED IN THE

NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM)
The H8 menu allows erasure of the data stored in the
non-volatile memory. This is useful in the case of
replacing the ECM from another tractor. The ECM’s
data from the previous tractor can be erased for the
tractor the ECM is going into. Use the following
procedure to erase the data stored in the ECM’s
non-volatile memory.

26083
manual. 47
4. Press the “HMENU” button eight times. “H8”
ERASE?
5. After a few seconds “ERASE?” will be displayed
on the on the CDU display.
6. To erase the non-volatile memory, press and hold
the down button on the CDU. The display will
show the following countdown sequence:
ERASE 5s, ERASE 4s, ERASE 3s, ERASE 2s,
ERASE 1s, ERASED. Releasing the down 10006107
button at anytime during this countdown will 48
abort the erasure of the non-volatile memory and
revert back to beginning of H8 mode.
7. Allow the ECM to self-configure by disconnecting
the CDU and turning the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position. Then turn the key switch to the “ON”
(B) position and leave the switch on for at least
5 seconds. The ECM will find the tractor
configuration.
store the tractor configuration in the ECM.
9. (A) and (B) clutches must be calibrated (H1).
Error code(s) should have been erased, HF, and
if necessary, clutch fill times should be adjusted,
H6 and H7. Also double check configuration in
H3 menu.
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS would display this is: 1 > 538. The values are not
The H9 menu allows inspection of individual circuits, actual voltage, amperage, or ohm measurements.
sensors, senders, switches, and solenoids showing The values are analogue/digital counts. When a
a channel number that corresponds to a particular channel measures frequency, the value is measured
circuit and a value which corresponds into a in “Hertz” (Hz).
measurement. An example of how the diagnostic tool
H9 Power Shuttle Channel Description

Channel/Description Circuit/Connector--Pin Information
1 Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-24, Ground CN2-29
2 Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Signal CN2-25, Ground CN2-29
3 ECM 12V Key On Supply Voltage CN2-10 and CN2-34, Ground CN2-13
and CN2-14
4 ECM 12V Key START Supply Voltage CN1-15, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
5 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
6 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
7 Clutch “B” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-11, Signal CN1-5
8 Clutch “A” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-10, Signal CN1-6
9 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-26
10 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-27
11 Wheel Speed sensor Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
12 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
13 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Solenoid NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
14 ECM 5V Input Sensor Supply Voltage CN2-20, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
15 ECM 12V Fuse Supply Voltage CN2-1, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
16 Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-4
17 Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-28
18 Creeper Engagement Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
19 Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
20 Engine Speed Sensor Frequency (Alternator + W) Signal CN2-15
Use the following procedures to access the voltmeter
functions:

(A) and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle
ECM, as described previously in this manual.
Ensure the parking brake is set.
26083
49
“HMENU” should appear on the display. Release
the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button nine times. “H9”
H9
5. After a few seconds the first channel will be
indicated on the CDU display.
6. The channels, up to 24, may be displayed by
using the up and down buttons on the CDU.
Listed below are the channels and their values.
10006107
IMPORTANT: Transmission operation is enabled in
this menu. 50
NOTE: The status of the tractor (with key switch in

the “OFF”, “ON” (engine off), or “START” (engine
running) position) is listed behind the channel title in
parenthesis.
NOTE: Sometimes the clutch pedal position is not

stated. This is because the Power Shuttle FNR lever
may be stated in a certain position. The clutch pedal
depressed is the same as the Power Shuttle FNR
lever in neutral.
1. Clutch Pedal Potentiometer, (ON)
• released, (pedal up), 542 (maximum)
• depressed, (pedal down), 38 (minimum)
2. Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor, (ON)
NOTE: “HC Menu” will display transmission oil 1 → 538
temperature in degrees Celsius.
• At 0_ C (32_ F) 463 + 69
• At 30_ C (86_ F) 225 + 33
• At 60_ C (140_ F) 136 + 20
10006107
• At 90_ C (194_ F) 53 + 8
51
3. ECM +12 VF Keyed Battery Supply Voltage,
(ON)
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge,

prolonged cranking) 428
• Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Battery charge at 16V (overcharge) 762
4. ECM +12VD Keyed Battery Voltage, (START)
a) Clutch pedal released and Power Shuttle

FNR lever in the forward or reverse position.
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge) 428

b) Power Shuttle FNR lever in the neutral posi-

tion or clutch pedal depressed 0-95
5. Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position

Switch, (NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA
MODELS)
6. Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position

MODELS)
WARNING
The tractor will move when checking channels 7
and 8. Be sure the area around the tractor is clear
of people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death or
damage may occur.
NOTE: For channels 7 and 8, reading will vary

depending upon clutch calibration values.
NOTE: Allow at least six seconds for the CDU to

indicate an actual reading as solenoids ramp up to
proper amperage. Ramp up time is dependent upon
operating temperature of hydraulic fluid.
7. Clutch (B) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus 15. 12V Fuse Sensed Voltage, (ON)
Status Sensed, (START)
• Release the parking brake • Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Place range control lever into “A” • Battery charge at 16 V (overcharge) 762
• Place the gear selector lever into first
16. Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into
(ON)
reverse for all transmissions
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 • In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
8. Clutch (A) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus
Status Sensed, (START) 17. Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
(ON)
• Release the parking brake
• In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• Place range control lever into “A”
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 18. Creeper Control Lever (NOT USED ON TNDA
forward position for all transmissions OR TNSA MODELS)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 19. Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency, (ON)
9. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch, WARNING

(ON) The tractor will move when checking channel 19.
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 Be sure the area around the tractor is clear of
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death, or
10. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch, damage may occur.
(ON)
NOTE: The reading displayed when the Power
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 Shuttle FNR lever is placed in the forward position is
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 dependent upon tires and the differential gear ratio
the tractor is equipped with.
11. Wheel Speed Sensor Voltage, (START)
• Place range control lever into the highest
NOTE: The tractor will not be moved during this test. range
• Place range control lever into highest range • Place the gear selector lever into first 0-60
• Place gear selector lever into first • Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into the
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into the “forward” position 0-3000
forward position.
20. Engine Speed Sensor Frequency
• Display with wheels not moving (Alternator+W), (START)
(536 min – 831 max) 600
• 2500 RPM for software prior to 4.0 515
While Driving (tractor moving) • 2000 RPM for software 4.0 to 5.0 33
• 4 kph (2.4 mph) 3 • 2000 RPM for software 5.01 430
• 20 kph(12.4 mph) 16 NOTE: There is no channel set aside in “H9” to check
12. Synchronizer in Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid, the dump solenoid, driver versus status sensed,
(NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS) circuit CN1-18 and CN1-2. A true test to this solenoid
is with an actual voltmeter with the red lead (+) to
13. Synchronizer in Forward (Hi/Lo) Position
CN1-18 and the black lead (-) to ground.
Solenoid, (NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA
MODELS) • With FNR lever in neutral or with clutch pedal
14. 5V input Sensor Supply Voltage, (ON) depressed -- solenoid energized 12V
• (521 min. – 849 max.) 670 • With FNR lever NOT in neutral and with
clutch pedal released -- solenoid not
energized 0V
HA-CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

AND STATUS SWITCH
The HA menu displays input values of both the clutch
pedal potentiometer and status switch. The clutch
pedal potentiometer position is expressed as a
percentage of the entire travel range while the clutch
pedal switch status is indicated by ON and OFF
during the travel of the pedal.
The transmission operation is enabled in this menu.

It is possible to drive the tractor and at the same time
record the clutch pedal potentiometer travel and
clutch pedal switch status from the CDU display. This
menu can also be viewed with the tractor stationary.
(A) and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle
26083
52
the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until the “HA”
appears on the CDU display.
HA
10006107
53
5. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) into the
forward position.
F
NOTE: To run stationary test (if engine is running), R
disengage the range lever and engage the parking
brake.
54
6. When the clutch pedal is released the
percentage should be 100% or 99 % ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the

percentage should be 0% or 1% OFF.
As the clutch pedal is being depressed, the 100% ON

display should change from “ON” to “OFF” before
5%.
As the clutch pedal is being released, the display

should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%.
“OFF” means the clutch pedal switch is open so 10006107

the dump solenoid is de-energized, oil is dumped
to sump from the clutch packs. 55
“ON” means the clutch pedal switch is closed so

the dump solenoid is energized, oil is supplied to
the clutch packs.
0% OFF
10006107
56
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position to
disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU”
button on the instrument to access another
menu.
CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

REPLACEMENT AND CLUTCH PEDAL
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
If the clutch pedal potentiometer has been replaced,
the previous data for the clutch must be erased using
the H8 menu. Once the data has been erased, use
the following procedure to calibrate the new
potentiometer and adjust the switch.
1. Turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” (B) position to
allow the ECM to perform the self configuration
(first start-up). Turn the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position to save the configuration.
2. Turn the key switch back to the “ON” (B) position.
After a few moments the service transmission
light will begin to flash the error code for
“non-calibrated clutches”. Ignore this error for
now.
3. To calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer limits,
fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch
pedal for a few seconds at the bottom travel limit. 1
4. Release the clutch pedal and allow the clutch to
remain at the top travel limit for a few seconds.
Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to 57
save the potentiometer limit calibration.
5. The clutch pedal potentiometer limit has been
calibrated. Now the clutch packs will need
calibrated. as described previously in the H1
menu description. The clutch pedal switch will
also need adjustment (see step 6--8).
NOTE: The clutch pedal switch is located under the
left lower dash cover on the inside of the clutch pedal 1
pivot.
6. To adjust the clutch pedal switch (1) access the
HA menu using the CDU.
When the clutch pedal is released (raised), the
percentage should be 100% or 99% ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the 2
percentage should be O% or 1% OFF.
As the clutch pedal is being depressed, the
5%.
50025110
should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%. 58
7. If the readings are not as specified, adjust the
clutch pedal switch by loosening the switch
mounting screws (2) and moving the switch as
needed. The CDU display should change from
“ON” to “OFF” before 5% as the clutch is being
depressed and the display should change from
“OFF” to “ON” before 15% as the clutch pedal is
being released.
8. Make sure the mounting screws are tightened
once the clutch pedal switch is adjusted properly.
button to access another menu.

SENDER
NOTE: The transmission can be operated in this
mode.
The HC menu displays the temperature transmission
oil in degrees Celsius. To display the transmission oil
temperature, use the following procedure:

manual.
26083
59
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HC” appears on
the CDU.
T = 21°C
5. After a few seconds the display on the CDU will
indicate the temperature of the transmission oil,
in degrees Celsius. An example is: T = 21° C. The
temperature range is --40°C to +120°C (--40°F) to
+248°F).
disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU” 10006107
button on the CDU to access another menu. 60
HD--HI/LO SYNCHRONIZER OPERATION

(NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS)
NOTE: The transmission should be disabled, but
ensure the range lever is in neutral and the parking
brake is engaged.
The HD menu is used to inspect the operation of the
Forward/Reverse (Hi/Lo--Shuttle) Synchronizer and
will indicate the status of the synchronizer on the
CDU display. Use the following procedure to inspect
the F/R synchronizer operation.
2. Hold the “HMENU” button on the CDU and turn
the key switch (1) to the “START” position (C) and
start the engine.
26083
61
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the CDU
display. Release the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HD” appears on
the CDU display.
5. After a few seconds the CDU display will indicate HD
the status of the synchronizers position.
An example is: Pos = Hi/Lo, means the
synchronizer in the rear position ready for
forward travel, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor
pressed, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor not
pressed.
10006107
If the display indicates Pos = SHTL (or SHUT),
62
the synchronizer is in the front position for
reverse travel, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor
pressed, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = UNKN, the ECM is
unsure of what position the synchronizer is in,
because the synchronizer did not engage
properly or is malfunctioning in some way,
normally Error Code 72.
NOTE: In case of failure of one or both synchronizer
position sensor, the message Pos = UNKN could be
displayed even if the synchronizer moves and
engages correctly. In this case, however, the Error
Code selected for the particular position sensor
should appear flashing on the instrument panel.
In normal conditions, the F/R synchronizer should

never be in the mechanical neutral position. If not
following a mechanical or electro-hydraulic problem,
the F/R synchronizer is always meshed with forward
or reverse gear even if the Power Shuttle FNR lever
or clutch pedal are in neutral. Mechanically there is
not a neutral synchronizer position. The Power
Shuttle FNR lever or clutch pedal are causing the
clutch packs to neutralize.
In normal conditions at engine start-up and during

ECM self-diagnosis, the F/R synchronizer is moved
automatically by the ECM to the opposite position
from tractor shut down. For example, if the
synchronizer is in the forward position, then it would
be moved to the reverse position during
self-diagnosis.
6. Increase the engine to 1200 – 1400 RPM and use

the up arrow and down arrow buttons on the CDU
to change the position of the synchronizer. The
CDU display will indicate the position of the
synchronizer.
7. Change the synchronizer position several times

to be sure the synchronizer is functioning
properly.

button on the CDU to access another menu.
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENTS

The HE menu displays the speed threshold setting.
The ECM uses two shifting tables; one that is used
when the transmission is shifted above the speed
threshold setting; the other is used when the tractor
is shifted below the speed threshold setting. There
are three settings, as listed below.
• Low -- approximately 3 mph
• Med -- approximately 4 mph
• High -- approximately 8 mph
IMPORTANT: This value should not be changed as

it was set at the factory.

manual.
26083
63
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HE” appears on
the CDU display.
WST = MID
5. The display on the CDU will indicate one of the
following settings:
• High WST=HI (approx. 8 mph)
• Medium WST=MID (approx. 4 mph)
• Low WST=LOW (approx. 3 mph)
6. To change the engagement speed, use the up 10006107
and down buttons on the CDU until the desired 64
speed is indicated on the CDU display.
store the setting in the ECM.
HF-STORED ERROR CODES

When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECM
non-volatile memory and signalled by the indicator
lamp, (1). The HF menu allows access to Error
Codes that are stored in the non-volatile memory of
the ECM. Stored errors can be read and erased by
using the CDU. As soon as a fault condition is
detected by the ECM, the associated Error Code is
saved into the HF memory. Use the following
procedure to access the HF menu:
26304
65
2. Hold the “HMENU” button on the CDU and turn
the key switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
66
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the CDU
display. Release the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HF” appears on
the CDU display.
HF
5. The CDU display will indicate the last stored
Error Code. An example would be: E (9) =11.
6. The following key is used for Error Codes:
• E Error
• (9) Progressive storage channel of the
Error 10006107
• 11 Error Code number 67
7. The following will be displayed when there are no
Error Codes stored: E (1)=00 There is a
maximum of ten stored Error Codes. E(10) will be
the most recent Error Code.
NOTE: Do not hold the buttons that change the Error
Code displayed, otherwise the Error Codes may be E (1) = 00
erased.
8. If multiple Error Codes are present, use the up

arrow and down arrow buttons to view Error
Codes from other channels. Press them
momentarily when changing the Error Code
10006107
viewed.
9. Stored errors can be erased from the non-volatile 68
memory by pressing and holding the down arrow
button on the CDU until the following sequence
is displayed: ERASE 5s, ERASE4s, ERASE 3s,
ERASE 2s, ERASE 1s, ERASED.
NOTE: If the down arrow is released or the “HMENU”
is pushed during the erasure countdown, the
sequence is cancelled and the Error Codes are not
erased.
10. Release the down button once the errors have

been erased and turn the key switch to the “OFF”
position (A) for at least two seconds.
TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
WARNING other requested calibration operations.
Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and 6. There are two types of faults:
problem--solving easier.
FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be
displayed if the cause has been eliminated or
1. The measurements taken to read: repaired, even without switching off the tractor,
voltage; but the relative code will be saved in the
resistance; non--volatile memory (see HF MENU);
frequency. NO FAULT RESET: the fault remains on the
alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
must be carried out with a digital tester.
solved. To remove the fault display, stop then
restart the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a “no fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see
temperature of 20 o C (68 oF) (ambient temperature). HF MENU.
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the 7. The connection references indicate: the wire
relative resistance values shown in the manual dimension and colour, and the connection pin
should vary accordingly. number.
Example: 0.5 AB (2)
0.5 = wire dimension;
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a AB = wire colour;
resistance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). (2) = connection pin number.
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind
of service operations, check that the specific Electric Wire Color Coding
connections (ECM, sensors, switches, etc.) are A -- Light Blue M -- Brown
correctly connected. B -- White N -- Black
A faulty connection could be the cause of C -- Orange R -- Red
incorrect tractor operation. G -- Yellow S -- Pink
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECM H -- Grey V -- Green
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 307. L -- Blue Z -- Purple
5. If the ECM needs to be replaced, the following 8. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECM connections (85)
operations must be carried out: refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or the
the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the bigger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin
resident non--volatile memory); also check that number.
the self--configuration operation at the first 9. The faults are listed in progressive order starting
start--up (after ECM replacement) is correct; on page 104.
calibration of the hydraulic clutches MENU H1
page 18.
ECM LOCATION
The ECM (1) controls the POWER SHUTTLE.
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
(ECM and EST)
On tractors with Power Shuttle transmissions, an 1
Electronic Control Module (ECM) commands the
operation and troubleshooting of input and output
sensors, and an operating software program
monitors and controls the system. A diagnostic
program downloaded in the Electronic Service Tool
(EST), (1) identifies where and when faults occur in
the system. Refer to the Special Tools chart at the
front of Chapter 3 for EST part numbers.
NOTE: For detailed information on handling and 10036171
operating the EST, refer to the operator’s manual that
accompanies the tool. For procedures on connecting 69
and operating the EST on the tractor, refer to
“Connecting The Electronic Service Tool to the
Tractor” in this chapter.
The ECM has two modes of “Auto Self-Diagnostic”
functions to detect abnormal operating conditions in
the ECM itself or in any circuits the ECM controls or
monitors. The ECM will detect failures or abnormal
conditions and once detected will switch to error logic
and failure management logic circuitry in the ECM.
The first mode is when the key switch (1) is turned
from the “OFF” (A) position to the “RUN” position (B)
when starting the tractor. This self-diagnosis could
continue up to 30 seconds if abnormal conditions are
detected.
The second mode is real-time self-diagnosis while
the tractor is running, “RUN” posistion (B).
70
condition in either mode, the ECM error logic will
signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp (1) on
the instrument panel to flash a code. The failure
to priority.
26304
71
AUTOMATIC SELF-DIAGNOSIS (ECM)
The ECM automatically does a self-diagnosis of the

different system parts when the key switch (1) is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “RUN” position
(B) when starting the tractor. The configuration of
these parts is already stored in the non-volatile
memory.
72
During the self-diagnosis period the trasmission
status light (1, fig. 73) will remain on. The 1
self-diagnosis process could continue for up to 30
seconds if abnormal conditions are detected.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to move the tractor prior

to the completion of self diagnosis the self diagnosis
will be terminated, the transmission status light will be
turned off and error codes may not be displayed.
73
Once the self-diagnosis is completed and if there is
an abnormal condition or failure in one or more of the
ECM controlled systems, the ECM will cause the
alarm lamp (1, fig. 74) on the instrument panel to
flash a code, or the transmission status light (1,
fig. 73) will begin flashing alerting the operator that
there is a problem.
The ECM also performs real-time self diagnosis of
system components while the tractor is running,
“RUN” position (B). The ECM will perform this at
regular intervals to check for possible system failures 1
or abnormal conditions.
condition while the tractor is running, the ECM error 74
logic will signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp
on the instrument panel to flash a code, alerting the
operator that there is a problem. The failure
to their priority.
If an error with lower priority occurs while an error of
higher priority is already being signaled, the lower
priority error will be stored until the error of higher
priority has been removed.
If an error of higher priority occurs while an error of
lower priority is being signaled, the higher priority
error will be displayed after the lower priority error
sequence has been displayed.
ECM -- FIRST START--UP
(Self Configuration)
The ECM will require configuration when any one of

the following circumstances has occurred.
-- At the end of the production line.
-- Following ECM replacement.
-- Following erasure of the Non--Volatile memory

(NVM) (see H8 MENU).
-- Following manual configuration NONE (see H3

MENU). 75
Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the

engine.
Indicator (1) (fig. 76) will be illuminated
(non--flashing), after a while the indicator will flash to
repeat the recognised configuration code -- i.e.: rapid
flashing, followed by 1 flash.
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 75) to OFF for a few seconds:
the configuration is now saved in the
Non--Volatile memory (NVM).
76
TRANSMISSION DISABLED INDICATOR

LIGHT 1
The ECM is programmed with a fail-safe mode,
which will disable and cause the transmission to go
into neutral in the unlikely event that a malfunction
should occur. When the transmission is disabled the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) example in the
instrument panel will begin flashing or may be
illuminated.
There are basically three situations in which the

transmission can be disabled: 1) during start up, 2)
during operation with fault codes stored in the ECM,
3) disabled with no stored error codes.
77
Disabled during start-up
During the start up self-diagnosis period the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) will remain on
for a few (2 - 5) seconds (the self diagnosis period
could continue for up to 30 seconds if abnormal
conditions are detected).
If a fault is detected during start up, the ECM will

signal an error code causing the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 78) to flash a code alerting the operator there is
a problem. The transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) 1
will begin flashing, and the transmission will be
disabled.
Depending on the type of fault, the Power Shuttle 78

may not function until the clutch pedal is cycled, the
Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled, or until after the
problem is corrected.
NOTE: If the start up diagnostics is interrupted, the

Power Shuttle may not function until the clutch pedal
or the Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled after start
up.
Disabled with error codes stored
During normal operation if a critical error occurs the
transmission will be disabled and the error code will
be signaled through the alarm lamp (1) (fig. 78) on
the instrument panel. The transmission status light
(1) (fig. 77) may or may not begin flashing.
Disabled with no error codes stored
If during normal operation, when the FNR lever is
placed in either the forward or reverse position, or
while moving, the tractor transmission becomes
disabled, the status light (1) (fig. 77) begins flashing,
and no error codes are signaled on the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 79).
79
The tractor will not move until either the FNR lever (1)
or the clutch pedal is cycled.
This condition can be caused by either operator fault F
(not seated, gear/range levers not properly engaged, R
incorrect starting sequence) or system fault (seat
switch faulty, gear/range lever position switches 1
mis-adjusted/faulty, and alternator W+ wire).
NOTE: See electrical Section of this manual for
proper operation of operator’s presence circuit for
seat switch.
80
DIAGNOSIS DURING OPERATION 2 -- Priority Numerical value.
Diagnosis during operation is in real time and checks 3 -- Detection Group of conditions creating
for the eventual presence of anomalous conditions at the fault.
regular intervals, whilst the functional software is 4 -- Effects The eventual effect of the
working. fault on the system.
The diagnosis should check all conditions shown 5 -- Correction The condition that corrects
under the DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS the fault, if possible, and the
headings. functional change of the
system after this correction.
FAULT DETECTION AND ANOMALOUS 6 -- Not displayed during calibration.
CONDITIONS MANAGEMENT LOGIC 7 -- Not displayed in Cab Test mode: this mode is
accessed by sending a series of “commands” to the
The start--up and functional code also includes the
ECM, through the serial connection.
faults detection and anomalous conditions
management logic. The TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
This logic processes the faults information provided heading contains the definitions of the system errors,
by the diagnostics (start--up diagnosis and diagnosis subdivided into the aforementioned fields.
during operation) and functional bodies, indicating
the condition of the system, in order to detect “system
faults” and “anomalous conditions”. MULTIPLE ANOMALOUS CONDITIONS --
The faults detection and anomalous conditions PRIORITY
management logic also diagnoses ECM and external
In the event of multiple anomalous conditions, as
circuit anomalies, where the hardware can not be
explained in the following heading, the display logic
diagnosed directly; i.e. it checks the coherence of the
uses the “Priority” field to establish the code to
functional bodies and their configuration.
display. Unless otherwise specified, the resulting
Each time the faults logic detects a “system error” or multiple anomalous condition effect/condition is
an “anomalous condition”, the fault code will be provided by superimposing each individual
displayed, it creates a fault which is processed by the effect/correction; in the event of incompatibility
faults buffer logic in the non--volatile memory, the between the different corrections, the correction
faults display logic and the anomalous conditions linked with the highest priority fault is used.
management logic.
The anomalous conditions management logic
considers the effect of the faults that effect tractor FAULT DISPLAY LOGIC
operation.
The logic also manages the correction procedure for Introduction
a fault condition. As soon as a problem is detected, it must be
Each fault is described using the following fields: displayed by the indicator lamp (1, fig. 79).
1 -- Fault code Numerical value.
ELECTRONIC SERVICE TOOL (EST) a) short to +12.
The Electronic Service Tool (EST) indicates fault b) short to ground or open circuit.
conditions relative to the HH menu, e.g.: calibration c) nominal range deviation.
Uxx codes. 12VF KEY SUPPLY.
Other fault conditions, unless masked by the “cab 12VD CLUTCH DRIVERS SUPPLY.
tester mode” or “calibration mode”, are flashed on the
illuminated signal lamp (1, fig. 79). a) short to ground or open circuit.
b) nominal range deviation.
DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS
INPUT DIAGNOSTICS
ECM and relative circuits fault.
The unit must be provided with a watchdog for ECM Anomalous condition description and reset
anomalous conditions). For each of the following inputs, apart from when
The length of the software cycle should be 10 ms, there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous
whereas the watchdog pause should be 16.5 ms conditions must be diagnosed (independently of the
(longer pauses are not recommended). ECM status).
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms
Reaction to fault. (longer pauses are not recommended).
At start--up, and in the event of microprocessor AN1 Clutch pedal potentiometer.
anomalous conditions, none of the solenoid valves AN2 Forward gear lever switch.
are enabled.
AN8 Not used.
Follow--up reaction. AN9 Not used.
In the event of an anomalous condition, the AN10 Not used.
watchdog and reset circuit must guarantee that the AN11 Not used.
ECM does not excite the solenoid valves. AN12 Not used.
-- short to 5V or 12V.
POWER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS
For each ulterior current supply, apart from when
AN3 Not used.
there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous
conditions must be diagnosed, independently of the AN5 Not used.
ECM status). AN6 Not used.
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms AN4 Oil temperature sensor.
(longer pauses are not recommended). -- short to ground.
-- short to 5V or 12V or circuit open.
Anomalous condition description and reset
AN7 Fuse 20.
5V SENSORS SUPPLY.
8V SENSORS SUPPLY.
POWER SHUTTLE FAULT CODE PRIORITY
11 CPDL_POT_LO_DISABLING_ERR 14 SL Dis
11 CPDL_POT_LO_ERR 75′ Fixed Lim
12 CPDL_POT_HI_DISABLING_ERR 15 SL Dis
12 CPDL_POT_HI_ERR 74′ Fixed Lim
13 UD_SW_ON_ERR 67 Auto None
14 C1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 22 CP/SL Dis
14 C1_SW_HI_ERR 83′ Fixed Mod
15 C1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 23 CP/SL Dis
15 C1_SW_LO_ERR 84′ Fixed Mod
16 G1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 24 CP/SL Dis
16 G1_SW_HI_ERR 85′ Fixed Mod
17 G1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 25 CP/SL Dis
17 G1_SW_LO_ERR 86′ Fixed Mod
18 CREEPER_ENG_SW_HI_ERR 47 Fixed Mod
19 CREEPER_ENG_SW_LO_ERR 48 Fixed Mod
21 CH_HARN_ERR 1 Fixed Crit.Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_DIS_ERR 39 CP/SL Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_ERR 97′ Fixed Lim
23 SOL_B_SHORT_DIS_ERR 37 CP/SL Dis
23 SOL_B_SHORT_ERR 95′ Fixed Lim
24 CL_UNCAL_ERR 100 Fixed Mod
26 ERPM_HI_ERR 65 Fixed Mod
27 ERPM_LO_ERR 66 Fixed Mod
28 B_CL_UNCAL_ERR 101 Fixed Mod
29 A_CL_UNCAL_ERR 102 Fixed Mod
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 31 CP/SL Dis
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_ERR 90′ Fixed Lim
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 33 CP/SL Dis
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_ERR 92′ Fixed Lim
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_DIS_ERR 35 CP/SL Dis
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_ERR 98′ Fixed Lim
35 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_12V_ERR 8 Fixed Crit.Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 34 CP/SL Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 99′ Fixed Lim
37 CL_SW_OC_ERR 13 CP/SL Dis
38 SOL_B_SHORT_12V_ERR 9 Fixed Crit.Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 36 CP/SL Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 94′ Fixed Lim
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 38 CP/SL Dis
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 96′ Fixed Lim
42 SOL_A_SHORT_12V_ERR 11 Fixed Crit.Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 18 CP/SL Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 81′ Fixed Lim
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 21 CP/SL Dis
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 82′ Fixed Lim
46 FUSE_20_ERR 51 Auto Lim
47 CL_SW_HI_ERR 55 Fixed Mod
48 CL_SW_LO_ERR 56 Fixed None
49 WHLSPD_SNR_HI_ERR 63 Fixed Mod
51 TEMP_SNDR_OC_ERR 53 Auto Mod
52 TEMP_SNDR_SC_ERR 54 Auto Mod
55 FORWARD_SW_HI_ERR 57 Auto None
56 FORWARD_SW_LO_ERR 58 Auto None
57 REVERSE_SW_HI_ERR 61 Auto None
58 REVERSE_SW_LO_ERR 62 Auto None
59 FNR_SW_DISAGREE_ERR 43 Auto Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 16 CP/SL Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 76′ Fixed Lim
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 17 CP/SL Dis
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 77′ Fixed Lim
63 SYNCRO_HL_ENG_ERR 40 SL/HI Dis
64 SYNCRO_SHTL_ENG_ERR 41 SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 32 CP/SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 91′ Fixed Lim
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 28 CP/SL Dis
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 89′ Fixed Lim
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 27 CP/SL Dis
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_ERR 87′ Fixed Lim
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 26 CP/SL Dis
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_ERR 88′ Fixed Lim
69 WHLSPD_SNRLO_ERR 64 Fixed Mod
71 SYNC_START_UP_INIT_ERROR 93 Auto Dis
72 SYNC_POPPED_OUT_ERR 42 CP/SL Dis
73 V_12VF_FAILED_HI 2 Fixed Crit.Dis
74 V_12VF_FAILED_LOW 3 Fixed Crit.Dis
76 NVM_RD_ERR 68 Fixed Mod
81 PRESS_SW_OC_ERR 49 Fixed Mod
82 PRESS_SW_SC_ERR 50 Fixed Mod
SYMBOLS USED
CORRECTION column
Fixed the fault continues to be displayed (NO RESET).

Auto the fault is no longer displayed when the conditions that generated the fault are no longer present
(RESET).
SL the fault is no longer displayed by using the Shuttle (SL) and/or the clutch pedal (CP).
CP the fault is no longer displayed using the clutch pedal (CP).
Hi the fault is no longer displayed pressing the pushbutton (Hi).
Combinations of the aforementioned symbols are possible.
EFFECT column
Dis. Crit. the gears are critically disabled by this fault.

This fault can only be deleted by switching off the ECM.
Dis. the gears are disabled, the “correction” column explains how the gears
can be enabled.
LIM the fault condition limits tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that disable certain functions.
Mod. the fault condition effects tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that make the tractor move slowly or abruptly.
CODE column
Contains the numerical code to display.
PRIORITY column
The apostrophe indicates that the CODE has already been used by a previously listed fault condition.
Electronic Service Tool (EST)
Specific remote diagnosis operations can be carried
out with the Electronic Service Tool.
Errors code
If the Faults Detection Logic reads a fault condition,
the code will flash on the indicator. In this manner, the
fault condition can be displayed while in HH mode.
During calibration, certain faults may be masked.
The EST gives access to the following menus:

H2 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION VALUES
DISPLAY
H4 -- SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS
H6 -- CLUTCH A FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H7 -- CLUTCH B FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H8 -- DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE
NON--VOLATILE MEMORY (EEPROM)
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS
HA -- CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION AND SWITCH
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
HD -- SHUTTLE SYNCHRONISER POSITION
NOT ACCESSIBLE ON TNDA OR TNSA
MODELS
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENT
HF -- FAULTS SAVED IN THE ECM
NON--VOLATILE MEMORY
NOTE: The tractor can only be used in the H6, H7,

H9, HA, HC and HE menus.
While other menus are being used the transmission
is disabled.
If tractor movement is detected while these menus
are in use, the menu will be interrupted and
transmission will be enabled; to re--enter the HH
MENU, stop the tractor and press the button on the
EST cable.
To exit from an active MENU, press the button on the
EST cable.
If the menu allows tractor movement, stop the tractor
(speed = 0).
DOWNLOADING THE LATEST SOFTWARE

INTO TNDA OR TNSA SERIES TRACTOR
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROL MODULE
WITH THE ELECTRONIC SERVICE TOOL.
1. Stage the Electronic Service Tool (EST) near the
tractor.
2. Turn ON the Electronic Service Tool.
NOTE: For more detailed information on operating
the EST refer to the operator’s manual that
accompanies the EST.
3. Click the EST icon on the left side of the start--up

screen. The EST program will load.
IMPORTANT: When first opened, the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen displays the cable and
software information for the vehicle selected during
the last operation of the EST.
4. The Vehicle Connection Selection screen opens
and displays the part number of the cable, 1
required for connecting the EST to the vehicle.
The title bar, 2, at the top of the screen lists the
2 3
current vehicle selected. In addition, the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen displays the
Programming and Diagnostic Components
Supported, 3. Verify that the TN Series Tractor is
the selected vehicle in the title bar. If the title bar 1
displays the TN Series Tractor, then skip to Step
11. If not, proceed to Step 5 for instructions on
selecting the desired vehicle. 4
5. To change the vehicle selected to the TN Series
Tractor, click the OK button, 4, at the bottom of 81
the Vehicle Connection Selection screen to close
the window.
6. Once the Vehicle Connection Selection screen
closes, click the TOOL button on the top menu
bar.
7. Click the EQUIPMENT SELECTION command
from the drop down menu.
8. Click the NEW HOLLAND logo. The Equipment
Selection screen opens. Scroll down to the TN
Series tractor, 1, and click to highlight it. Click the
OK button, 2, to close the window.
1
2
82
9. A pop-up window opens to confirm the
reconfigure, 1. Click the OK button, 2, to close the
1
window. The TN Series Tractor software loads.
10. The Vehicle Connection Selection, screen
reopens and displays the part number of the
required cable for connection of the EST to the
TN Tractor.
83
11. After verifying the correct cable part number,
click the OK button at the bottom of the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen, Figure 81, to close
the window. The Programming screen, opens.
12. Connect cable end, 1, to the black TN Tractor 1
Diagnostic Harness for the Power Shuttle 2
Electronic Control Module (ECM) and connect
cable end, 2, to the EST interface cable.
50035626
84
13. At the tractor, turn the ignition key-switch to the
ON (RUN) position.
14. Click the VIEW CONTROLLER INFORMATION 1
button, 1, on the Programming screen. A pop-up
window opens and displays the current software
loaded in the TN Tractor Power Shuttle Control
Module. Record this information on a piece of
paper. Click the OK button to close the window.
15. Click the BROWSE button, 2.
85
16. The Program File Selection screen opens, 1.
17. Click to highlight the file, 2, for TN Series
Tractors. After highlighting the desired file, click 1
on the OPEN button, 3. A pop-up window will ask
for confirmation of this selection. Click the OK
2
button to close the window. Turn the key switch
OFF.
3
18. Verify that installation of the latest software is
necessary by comparing the software level on
the EST to the software level currently loaded in
the tractor Power Shuttle ECM.
If the latest software download is required, continue
with Step 19.
86
19. At the tractor, turn the ignition key-switch to the
ON (RUN) position.
NOTE: A pop-up window, 1, opens after clicking on
the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD button when the
tractor ignition key-switch is not in the ON (RUN)
position. The window displays the message “The
Service Tool was unable to properly set up the
Communication Port Interface hardware.”
87
20. When the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD button, 1, is
clicked a pop up window will appear to confirm
replacing the existing software. Click the OK
button to close the window. The software
download process begins.
NOTE: To monitor the software download process,
view the window, 2, in the bottom right-hand corner
of the EST screen.
When the download ends, a pop-up window 2

opens to confirm a successful download. Click 1
the OK button to close the window. Another pop
up window will appear providing instruction to
turn the ignition key-switch to the OFF Position. 88
21. Turn the ignition key-switch to the OFF position.
Click the OK button to close the window. This
completes the latest software download.
CONNECTING THE ELECTRONIC SERVICE

TOOL (EST) TO THE TRACTOR
WARNING
To prevent inadvertent movement of the tractor,
it is necessary to place the gear levers in the
neutral position before connecting and using the
Electronic Service Tool (EST).
1. Ensure the ignition Key-switch is in the OFF

position.
2. Set the praking brake, and place the gearshift
levers in the neutral position.
3. Release the retainer screws, 1, and pull the left
instrument panel guard, 2, off.
89
4. Identify the diagnostic unit connector(s), 1, under
the instrument panel. The connectors are color
coded for identification purposes. Use the
following list to determine the correct connector:
• Black: Power Shuttle Transmission
• Red: FWD Engagement
90
The following is a brief description of the EST screen:

H MENU BUTTON (1) Non-functional.
TEXT BOX (2) To identify the current
menu or routine selected. 3
UP ARROW (3) To scroll through lists, 4
save data, and calibrate
2
within menus. Select by
clicking the button on the 1
screen.
DOWN ARROW (4) To scroll through lists,
save data, and calibrate
within menus. Select by
clicking the button on the
screen. 91
NOTE: Press the pushbutton on the EST cable
repeatedly to scroll through the different H menus.
The H menu button on the lower left-hand corner of
the display window is non-functional.
5. Connect the EST cable (1) to the ECM connector.

The opposite end (2) should be connected to the
EST computer.
NOTE: Avoid damaging the connectors by observing
the correct relationship between the flat sides of the 1
pins. 2
50035626
92
6. Press and hold the pushbutton (1) on the eST
cable and turn the key-switch to the ON position. 1
50035626
93
When the text HH menu appears in the display,
release the pushbutton.
NOTE: If the H menu pushbutton on the EST cable
is not held long enough, then the text NO COM (1) will
be displayed on the EST screen. This is also true if
the key-switch is turned ON without the H menu
pushbutton pressed, or if there is a loose wire or pin 1
within one of the connectors.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the pushbutton on the
EST cable will scroll through the different menus
starrting with the H1 menu and so on. After reaching
the last menu, HF, the sequence begins again with
the HH menu. After app 2 seconds, the EST enters
the selected manu routine. To abort a procedure 94
while in an H menu, press the pushbutton on the EST
cable, and the display returns to the HH menu for a
new selection.
When performing the procedures beginning on page

70 of this chapter, scroll through the different H
menus by using the pushbutton on the EST cable.
Select or change data within each loaded menu by
using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. To complete
the storing process after changing data, turn the
key-switch (1) to the OFF (A) position for a minimum
of 5 seconds.
NOTE: Transmission operation is enabled during
use of the H6, H7, H9, HA HC and HF menus. During
execution of the remaining menus, the transmission
is not operated (it is disabled). If tractor wheel
movement (ground speed) is detected while the
transmission non-enabled menus are run, that
95
particular H menu execution is interruped and the
ECM enables the transmission. To re-start the
calibration, depress the clutch pedal or move the
shuttle lever to neutral, stop tractor movement, and
press the pushbutton on the EST cable until
obtaining the desired menu.

and wait approximately 5 seconds to store the
revised data.
NOTE: The functional software is always disabled

when the EST is connected to the diagnosis
connection, unless otherwise specifically noted.
Consult the description of the individual HH menus in
order to understand why the functional software is
disabled.
96
WARNING
Park the tractor on level ground in an
unobstructed area (in case of sudden
movement).
Engage the handbrake, switch off all electrical

switches and the air conditioning system, if on.
Set the Shuttle control lever in neutral, the

hydraulic lift lower arms down, the remote
control valve levers in neutral and switch off the
engine.
Put safety wedges under the front and rear

wheels.
Check that the transmission oil temperature is

between 20 to 50 °C (68 to 122 °C).
Unless otherwise specified, the levers:

- Shuttle;
- Gear shift;
- Range gear;
- Creeper;
are in the NEUTRAL position.

H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B
CALIBRATION
The H1 menu provides access to Power Shuttle
clutches (A) and (B) calibration, reducing the engine
speed when the clutches start engaging. The ECM
reads engine RPM from the alternator to accomplish
this.
The calibration of the clutches is necessary when the
following has occurred:
• Poor transmission performance
• Solenoid valve has been replaced
• Erasure of non--volatile memory in the ECM
(using the H8 menu)
• ECM has been replaced
• After initial break-in period -- first 50 hrs.
Use the following procedure to calibrate the clutches.
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF”
position (A) and connect the EST to the Power
Shuttle ECM as described previously in this
manual.
2. While pressing the button on the EST cable, turn
the key to the “START” position (C).
97
3. After the tractor has gone through self diagnosis
and has started, release the button on the EST
cable. The “HMENU” should appear on the EST
display.
H1
4. Press the button on the EST cable once. “H1”
should appear on the EST display. After a few
seconds, “CALIBR” will appear momentarily on
the EST display and then change to the
transmission fluid temperature.
5. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set and
increase the engine speed to 1300 + 100 RPM.
98
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).
99
7. Place the range lever (2) into the highest range.
8. Place the gear selection lever into first gear (1).
100
9. Position the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) to the
forward position.
10. Slowly release the clutch pedal, making sure the F
tractor does not move. R
1
101
CLUTCH A CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the EST displays a “U” error code during the
calibration procedure, refer to the table at the end of
this procedure in this Section to identify and remedy
the problem. An example of an error code would be
U21 (engine speed lower than 1200 RPM).
1. Click and hold the down arrow (1) on the EST.
Initially the EST will display “STAB.RPM”, then
the initial value of the setting in milli--amps (mA).
2. Continue holding the down arrow (1) until the STAB.RPM
engine speed reduces about 50 RPM and the
final calibration setting flashes continuously. An 1
value and lurch represent the point the energized
point is not full but approximately 40 -- 50 psi.
3. Release the down arrow (1) and the EST
displays the transmission oil temperature. 102
CLUTCH B CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the EST displays a “U” error code during the
calibration procedure, refer to the table at the end of
this procedure in this Section to identify and remedy
the problem. An example of an error code would be
U21 (engine speed lower than 1200 RPM).
4. Click and hold the up arrow (1) on the EST.
Initially the EST will display “STAB.RPM”, then
the initial value of the setting in milli--amps (mA).
5. Continue holding the up arrow (1) until the engine STAB.RPM 1
speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final
calibration setting flashes continuously. An
value and lurch represent the point the energized
point is not full but approximately 45 -- 50 psi.
103
6. Release the up arrow and the EST displays the
transmission oil temperature.
store the clutch values. A = 286 mA
NOTE: If the tractor operation is abrupt after
calibrating the clutches, refer to the H6 and H7
menus to adjust the fill times for the clutches.
calibration and fill times will need adjusted
accordingly.
NOTE: Transmission output speed, engine RPM,
clutch pedal position, gear and range lever positions
are constantly monitored. Calibration can go on only
if the tractor is stationary, the Power Shuttle FNR 104
lever is not in neutral, the main (C1) and range (G1)
shift levers are not in neutral, and the clutch pedal is
released. If calibration conditions have not been met,
this will be displayed and the associated error code
will be flashed on the instrument panel. If the fault
condition is relevant to calibration, a “U” code will be
displayed on the EST.
Calibration Error Codes

Code Cause Remedy
U19 Transmission oil temperature lower Drive tractor to increase transmission oil temperature
than 10_ C (50_ F) ∗
U20 Incorrect starting procedure Press and release clutch pedal
U21 Engine speed lower than 1200 RPM Increase engine speed
U22 Engine speed over 1400 RPM Decrease engine speed
U23 Power Shuttle control lever in neutral Place Power Shuttle control lever into the forward or
reverse position as required.
U24 Range selector in neutral Place range lever into highest range
U25 Gear selector in neutral Place gear lever into first gear
U26 Clutch pedal not fully raised Release clutch pedal fully
U27 Clutch pack (B) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U28 Clutch pack (B) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U29 Clutch pack (A) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U30 Clutch pack (A) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U31 Tractor is moving Engage parking brake
U32 Hi/Lo synchronizer not engaged Check synchronizer using the HD menu
(*) Between 10_ C (50_ F) and 20_ C (68_ F) the

EST display will show “COLD OIL”. However, when
continuing to hold the up arrow or the down arrow
button, the calibration will continue.
VALUES DISPLAY
The H2 menu displays the calibration values
expressed in milli-amps (mA), for the “A” and “B”
hydraulic clutch solenoid valves. These values were
obtained by the ECM during the clutch calibration in
the H1 menu.
Use the following procedure to obtain the values:
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” (A)
position and connect the EST to the Power
manual.
2. While holding the button on the EST cable, turn
the key switch to the “ON” (B) position.
Release the button on the EST cable.
26083
105
4. Press the button on the EST cable twice. “H2”
should appear on the EST display.
NOTE: The display automatically shows the “A”
clutch value. H2
106
5. Click the up arrow on the EST to obtain the value
for the “B” clutch. The current stored value, in
mA, will be displayed. An example would be
B=290 mA.
A = 286 mA
6. Click the down arrow (1) on the EST to obtain a
value for the “A” clutch. The current stored value, 1
expressed in mA, will be displayed. An example
would be: A=286 mA (2). 2
7. The mA range for each clutch must be between
230 mA and 480 mA (for either clutch).
8. Turn the key switch (1) fig. 105 to the “OFF” (A)
position or enter another menu by pressing the
button on the EST cable.
107
The H3 menu displays the system configuration
stored in the non-volatile memory (NVM) menu after
a tractor with a new ECM has been initially started up.
H3 also allows the transmission to be configured
manually.
and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle ECM
connector, as described previously in this
manual.
2. Hold the button on the EST cable and turn the key
switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
108
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the display.
4. Press the button on the EST cable three times. H3
“H3” will appear on the EST display. After several
seconds the configuration stored will be
displayed. One of the following configurations
will be shown:
• Pshuttle - Power Shuttle Transmission
• Hi/Lo (does not apply to TNDA OR TNSA
Models) - Power Shuttle Transmission with
Hi/Lo (32X16)
• Hi/Lo CR (does not apply to TNDA OR 109
TNSA Models) - Power Shuttle Transmis-
sion with Hi/Lo and Creeper (44X16)
• None - No configuration stored in memory,

occurs with the ECM replacement or erasure
of non-volatile memory (H8). Only detected
when the ECM first powers up.
None
110
NOTE: It is possible to select any configuration
available. Selection of the wrong configuration can
cause Error Codes to be displayed through the PS
Alarm lamp or causes tractor malfunctions. Selection
of the “NONE” will cause the ECM to conduct a
self-configuration at the next start-up. The self-con-
figuration check always gets performed when a
different ECM is installed, after H8 is cleared, and
whenever H3 configuration is set to “NONE”. The
ECM performs the self test by sending a signal out
through the harness and receives acknowledgement
of signs in from various sensors, switches, and
solenoids.
5. To quit the menu without modifying the
configuration, press the button on the EST cable.
6. If the configuration displayed does not match the
configuration the tractor is equipped with, the 1
configuration can be modified manually by
clicking the up arrow (1) until the correct
2
configuration is shown on the EST display.
7. When the correct configuration is shown, click
and hold the down arrow (2). The display on the
EST will start this sequence: “STORE 5s,
STORE 4s, STORE 3s, STORE 2s, STORE 1s,
STORED”. This shows the new configuration is
stored in the ECM. After the configuration has
been stored, release the down arrow on the EST. 111
NOTE: If the down arrow is released during the store
countdown, the latest changes to configuration will
not be stored and the EST displays the previous
setting.

fig. 108 and wait for at least two seconds to save
the configuration into the non-volatile memory.
H4 - POWER SHUTTLE HARDWARE AND

SOFTWARE REVISION LEVELS
The H4 menu will display the revision level of the
software that is installed in the ECM. Use the
following procedure to display the revision levels:

Shuttle ECM connector, as described previously
in this manual.
26083
112
4. Press the button on the EST cable four times. H4
“H4” should appear on the instrument display.
5. The instrument will display the following
information in a 8 second interval. Each
parameter will be displayed for 2 seconds and
then revert back to “HH MENU”.
• Product Identity (MA)
• Software Revision Level: (Release [00.01])
• Hardware Level: (02.00)
• Manufacturer -- set valves (40) 113
NOTE: It is also a good practice to remove the

instrument panel in order to record the ECM part
number, module serial number and batch number.
6. When finished viewing, press the button on the

EST cable to enter another menu or turn the key
switch to the “OFF” (A) position fig. 112.
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCH DIAGNOSIS

The H5 menu is for checking the status of the circuits
and control switches that are connected to the ECM.
The H5 menu allows inspection of each one of these
circuits for continuity and to check for transitions on
ECM inputs, either switch or analogue type, for
diagnostic purposes.
With reference to analogue inputs, “transition”

means that a certain threshold was exceeded. The
letter “d” and a number are displayed each time a
transition occurs.
The number displayed indicates in which circuit the
transition occurred. If same circuit has two
subsequent transitions, the message displayed
changes to “d0” when the second transition takes
place.
This routine also checks for Forward, Neutral and
Reverse button inconsistencies. The neutral button
is not tested separately through its own “d” number,
as the operator cannot induce neutral safety switch
transition in any manner without inducing it at the
same time on the Forward or Reverse buttons.
If the shuttle lever is moved with the clutch pedal
released, the neutral safety switch will originate a
transition also on the 12VD line, which is used to test
the clutch pedal button.
Following interaction among these buttons:
• The Forward and Reverse buttons should be
tested with the clutch pedal applied (down).
• The clutch pedal button should be tested with the
shuttle lever engaged (not in neutral).
• If the keystart switch is turned to the engine-on
position with the shuttle lever in neutral and the
clutch pedal down (normal start-up procedure),
a button inconsistency error may occur (exclu-
sively in this diagnostic mode).
When a clutch pedal button transition occurs (pedal
is released), clutch pedal potentiometer calibration
values are checked and also button adjustment is
checked. Proceed as follows to guarantee adequate
checking.
NOTE: It is important to follow each of the
procedures as described, otherwise the display on
the diagnostic instrument will not show the correct
reading.
manual.
26083
114
NOTE: The clutch pedal should be up (released).
4. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever, 1, in the F

forward position.
R
115
5. Press the button on the EST cable five times.
“H5” should appear on the EST display.
NOTE: d0 is always displayed first when H5 menu is
entered. To obtain the readings in the following H5
procedures the clutch pedal must be released and
the FNR lever must be in forward before entering H5
menu.
6. Observe the display on the EST while slowly

depressing the clutch pedal (at least two
seconds). The status of the potentiometer and
clutch switch is displayed. The display should
appear like this as the clutch pedal is being
depressed: d0 > d20 > d21 . d21 is displayed 116
when the clutch pedal “clicks” on the depressed
movement. If the clutch pedal is completely
released, the display will return to d20.
7. With the clutch pedal depressed, take the Power
Shuttle lever (1) from forward and return the lever
to neutral. The display will change from d21 > F
d22. Leave the tractor in neutral for a few R
seconds while observing the display. The display
should continue to show d22 ; this helps to verify
Error Code 59.
8. While the clutch pedal is depressed, place the
Power Shuttle lever into reverse. The display
should change from d22 to d23.
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal while observing
the display on the EST. The display should
change from reverse, d23, to the clutch switch,
d21, and then to the potentiometer, d20. This 117
verifies conditions related to Error Codes 11, 12,
47, and 48.
10. Place the gear selector lever (1) from neutral into
any gear. The EST display should show d33.
Removing the gear selector lever from a gear
should cause a second transition in that circuit
and the display should show d0.
NOTE: If the gear lever is in gear when H5 menu is
entered, or another control or switch is moved while
the gear lever is engaged the readings may be
opposite from step 10.
118
11. Place the range control lever (1) from the neutral
position to any range. The EST should display
1
d34.
NOTE: If any other control or switch is moved during
the shift, the “d” values may occur opposite as listed
above.
12. Stand up from the operator’s seat. This should

cause the EST display to change to d36. Sitting
down on the seat will cause a second transition
and the display to change back to d0.
119
13. For d29 (Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor),
d30 (Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor), and
d35 (Transmission Wheel Speed Sensor) to be
displayed on the EST, a transition must be
manually induced. This can be accomplished by
viewing the EST as the sensor is unplugged and
plugged back together.
SUMMARY OF SWITCH AND ANALOGUE INPUTS
d. code Switch and Analogue Inputs

d.0 When H5 menu is first entered; and when a second transition occurs on the same switch
d.20 Clutch pedal potentiometer
d.21 Clutch pedal switch (Power Shuttle FNR lever must be in forward or reverse)
d.22 Power Shuttle FNR lever in forward position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.23 Power Shuttle FNR lever in reverse position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.29 Hydraulic oil temperature circuit (unplugged versus plugged in)
d.30 Hydraulic oil pressure circuit (engine off versus engine started)
d.32 Fuse supply to EST (tool will not work if fuse is removed)
d.33 Main (C1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.34 Range (G1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.35 Wheel speed detection circuit (tractor moving)
d.36 Operator’s seat presence switch (stand-up)
H5 - MENU QUICK REFERENCE TEST PROCEDURE
Action Description Display
1 Enter the H5 menu with the clutch pedal released and the Shuttle lever in Forward. d0
Slowly press the clutch pedal (time > 2 seconds). The potentiometer status d20
2
change should be read first, followed by the pushbutton. d21
With the clutch pedal lowered, move the Shuttle lever from the Forward position
3
to neutral, to check the Forward selection pushbutton. d22
Leave the Shuttle lever in the neutral position for at least 1 second to check for
4
disagreement between the Forward/Neutral/Reverse pushbuttons (E59). (d22)
Holding down the clutch pedal, move the Shuttle lever from the neutral position to
5
Reverse, to check the relative pushbutton. d23
Release the clutch pedal slowly (time > 2 seconds).

The pushbutton status change should be read first. d21
6 Clutch pedal calibration is checked (E10, E11 and E12).
Clutch pedal pushbutton adjustment is checked (E47 and E48).
Finally, the potentiometer status change is read. d20
13 Carry out a status change on the oil temperature sensor. d29
15 Carry out a status change on the gear lever pushbutton. d33
16 Carry out a status change on the Range lever pushbutton. d34
17 Carry out a status change on the pressure switch. d30
18 Carry out a status change on the operator seat switch. d36

H6 - CLUTCH (A) FILL TIME

MODIFICATION AND DISPLAY
this menu.
The H6 menu displays the (A) clutch filling time and
(Full open solenoid valve for maximum flow of oil to
fill up clutch pack. The solenoid coil will receive full
voltage.)
characteristics.
accordingly.
manual.
the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
120
4. Press the button on the EST cable six times. “H6” H6 1
5. After a few seconds, the EST will display a value
the display may read: A=80ms. The clutch filling
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and click the up
and down buttons (1) to change the clutch filling
time by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default 121
setting is 70 ms.
properly store the clutch filling time in the tractor
ECM.
new value.
neutral position.
EST while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the EST from the tractor and test the
H7 - CLUTCH (B) FILL TIME

this menu.
The H7 menu displays the (B) clutch filling time and
characteristics.
accordingly.

and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle ECM,
26083
122
4. Press the button seven times. “H7” should
appear on the EST display.
5. After a few seconds, the EST will display a value
in milli-seconds (1/1000 second). For example, H7 1
the display may read: B=80ms. The clutch filling
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and click the up
and down buttons (1) to change the clutch filling
time by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default
setting is 70 ms.
properly store the clutch filling time into the tractor 123
ECM.

clutch fill time.
neutral position.
EST while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the EST from the tractor and test the
H8 - ERASURE OF DATA STORED IN THE

NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM)
The H8 menu allows erasure of the data stored in the
non-volatile memory. This is useful in the case of
replacing the ECM from another tractor. The ECM’s
data from the previous tractor can be erased for the
tractor the ECM is going into. Use the following
procedure to erase the data stored in the ECM’s
non-volatile memory.

26083
manual. 124
4. Press the “HMENU” button eight times. “H8” H8 1
5. After a few seconds “ERASE?” will be displayed
on the on the EST display.
6. To erase the non-volatile memory, click and hold
the down button (1) on the EST. The display will
show the following countdown sequence:
ERASE 5s, ERASE 4s, ERASE 3s, ERASE 2s,
ERASE 1s, ERASED. Releasing the down
button at anytime during this countdown will 125
abort the erasure of the non-volatile memory and
revert back to beginning of H8 mode.
7. Allow the ECM to self-configure by disconnecting
the EST and turning the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position. Then turn the key switch to the “ON”
(B) position and leave the switch on for at least
5 seconds. The ECM will find the tractor
configuration.
store the tractor configuration in the ECM.
9. (A) and (B) clutches must be calibrated (H1).
Error code(s) should have been erased, HF, and
if necessary, clutch fill times should be adjusted,
H6 and H7. Also double check configuration in
H3 menu.
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS would display this is: 1 > 538. The values are not
The H9 menu allows inspection of individual circuits, actual voltage, amperage, or ohm measurements.
sensors, senders, switches, and solenoids showing The values are analogue/digital counts. When a
a channel number that corresponds to a particular channel measures frequency, the value is measured
circuit and a value which corresponds into a in “Hertz” (Hz).
measurement. An example of how the diagnostic tool
H9 Power Shuttle Channel Description

Channel/Description Circuit/Connector--Pin Information
1 Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-24, Ground CN2-29
2 Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Signal CN2-25, Ground CN2-29
3 ECM 12V Key On Supply Voltage CN2-10 and CN2-34, Ground CN2-13
and CN2-14
4 ECM 12V Key START Supply Voltage CN1-15, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
5 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
6 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
7 Clutch “B” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-11, Signal CN1-5
8 Clutch “A” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-10, Signal CN1-6
9 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-26
10 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-27
11 Wheel Speed sensor Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
12 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
13 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Solenoid NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
14 ECM 5V Input Sensor Supply Voltage CN2-20, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
15 ECM 12V Fuse Supply Voltage CN2-1, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
16 Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-4
17 Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-28
18 Creeper Engagement Switch NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS
19 Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
20 Engine Speed Sensor Frequency (Alternator + W) Signal CN2-15
Use the following procedures to access the voltmeter
functions:

(A) and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle
26083
126
the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the “HMENU” button nine times. “H9” H9 1
5. After a few seconds the first channel will be
indicated on the EST display.
6. The channels, up to 24, may be displayed by
clicking the up and down buttons (1) on the EST.
Listed below are the channels and their values.
IMPORTANT: Transmission operation is enabled in

this menu. 127
NOTE: The status of the tractor (with key switch in

the “OFF”, “ON” (engine off), or “START” (engine
running) position) is listed behind the channel title in
parenthesis.
NOTE: Sometimes the clutch pedal position is not

stated. This is because the Power Shuttle FNR lever
may be stated in a certain position. The clutch pedal
depressed is the same as the Power Shuttle FNR
lever in neutral.
1. Clutch Pedal Potentiometer, (ON)
• released, (pedal up), 542 (maximum)
• depressed, (pedal down), 38 (minimum)
I--542
2. Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor, (ON)
NOTE: “HC Menu” will display transmission oil
temperature in degrees Celsius.
• At 0_ C (32_ F) 463 + 69
• At 30_ C (86_ F) 225 + 33
• At 60_ C (140_ F) 136 + 20
• At 90_ C (194_ F) 53 + 8
128
3. ECM +12 VF Keyed Battery Supply Voltage,
(ON)
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge,

prolonged cranking) 428
4. ECM +12VD Keyed Battery Voltage, (START)
a) Clutch pedal released and Power Shuttle

FNR lever in the forward or reverse position.

b) Power Shuttle FNR lever in the neutral posi-

tion or clutch pedal depressed 0-95
5. Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position

MODELS)
6. Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position

MODELS)
WARNING
The tractor will move when checking channels 7
and 8. Be sure the area around the tractor is clear
of people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death or
damage may occur.
NOTE: For channels 7 and 8, reading will vary

depending upon clutch calibration values.
NOTE: Allow at least six seconds for the EST to

indicate an actual reading as solenoids ramp up to
proper amperage. Ramp up time is dependent upon
operating temperature of hydraulic fluid.
7. Clutch (B) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus 15. 12V Fuse Sensed Voltage, (ON)
Status Sensed, (START)
• Release the parking brake • Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Place range control lever into “A” • Battery charge at 16 V (overcharge) 762
16. Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into
(ON)
reverse for all transmissions
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 • In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
8. Clutch (A) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus
Status Sensed, (START) 17. Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
(ON)
• Release the parking brake
• In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• Place range control lever into “A”
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 18. Creeper Control Lever (NOT USED ON TNDA
forward position for all transmissions OR TNSA MODELS)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 19. Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency, (ON)
9. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch, WARNING

(ON) The tractor will move when checking channel 19.
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 Be sure the area around the tractor is clear of
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death, or
10. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch, damage may occur.
(ON)
NOTE: The reading displayed when the Power
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 Shuttle FNR lever is placed in the forward position is
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 dependent upon tires and the differential gear ratio
the tractor is equipped with.
11. Wheel Speed Sensor Voltage, (START)
• Place range control lever into the highest
NOTE: The tractor will not be moved during this test. range
• Place range control lever into highest range • Place the gear selector lever into first 0-60
• Place gear selector lever into first • Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into the
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into the “forward” position 0-3000
forward position.
20. Engine Speed Sensor Frequency
• Display with wheels not moving (Alternator+W), (START)
(536 min – 831 max) 600
• 2500 RPM for software prior to 4.0 515
While Driving (tractor moving) • 2000 RPM for software 4.0 to 5.0 33
• 20 kph(12.4 mph) 16 NOTE: There is no channel set aside in “H9” to check
12. Synchronizer in Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid, the dump solenoid, driver versus status sensed,
(NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA MODELS) circuit CN1-18 and CN1-2. A true test to this solenoid
is with an actual voltmeter with the red lead (+) to
13. Synchronizer in Forward (Hi/Lo) Position
CN1-18 and the black lead (-) to ground.
Solenoid, (NOT USED ON TNDA OR TNSA
MODELS) • With FNR lever in neutral or with clutch pedal
14. 5V input Sensor Supply Voltage, (ON) depressed -- solenoid energized 12V
• (521 min. – 849 max.) 670 • With FNR lever NOT in neutral and with
clutch pedal released -- solenoid not
energized 0V
HA-CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

AND STATUS SWITCH
The HA menu displays input values of both the clutch
pedal potentiometer and status switch. The clutch
pedal potentiometer position is expressed as a
percentage of the entire travel range while the clutch
pedal switch status is indicated by ON and OFF
during the travel of the pedal.
The transmission operation is enabled in this menu.

It is possible to drive the tractor and at the same time
record the clutch pedal potentiometer travel and
clutch pedal switch status from the EST display. This
menu can also be viewed with the tractor stationary.
(A) and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle
26083
129
the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button until the “HA” appears on the HA
EST display.
130
5. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) into the
forward position.
F
NOTE: To run stationary test (if engine is running), R
disengage the range lever and engage the parking
brake.
131
6. When the clutch pedal is released the
percentage should be 100% or 99 % ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the

percentage should be 0% or 1% OFF. 100% ON

5%.

should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%.
“OFF” means the clutch pedal switch is open so

the dump solenoid is de-energized, oil is dumped
to sump from the clutch packs. 132
“ON” means the clutch pedal switch is closed so

the dump solenoid is energized, oil is supplied to
the clutch packs.
0% OFF
133
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position to
disconnect the EST or press the button on the
EST cable to access another menu.
CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

REPLACEMENT AND CLUTCH PEDAL
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
If the clutch pedal potentiometer has been replaced,
the previous data for the clutch must be erased using
the H8 menu. Once the data has been erased, use
the following procedure to calibrate the new
potentiometer and adjust the switch.
1. Turn the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position to
allow the ECM to perform the self configuration
(first start-up). Turn the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position to save the configuration.
2. Turn the key switch back to the “ON” (B) position.
After a few moments the service transmission
light will begin to flash the error code for
“non-calibrated clutches”. Ignore this error for
now.
3. To calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer limits,
fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch
pedal for a few seconds at the bottom travel limit. 1
4. Release the clutch pedal and allow the clutch to
remain at the top travel limit for a few seconds.
Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to 134
save the potentiometer limit calibration.
5. The clutch pedal potentiometer limit has been
calibrated. Now the clutch packs will need
calibrated. as described previously in the H1
menu description. The clutch pedal switch will
also need adjustment (see step 6--8).
NOTE: The clutch pedal switch is located under the
left lower dash cover on the inside of the clutch pedal 1
pivot.
6. To adjust the clutch pedal switch, 1, access the
HA menu using the EST cable button.
When the clutch pedal is released (raised), the
percentage should be 100% or 99% ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the 2
percentage should be O% or 1% OFF.
5%.
50025110
should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%. 135
7. If the readings are not as specified, adjust the
clutch pedal switch by loosening the switch
mounting screws, 2, and moving the switch as
needed. The EST display should change from
“ON” to “OFF” before 5% as the clutch is being
depressed and the display should change from
“OFF” to “ON” before 15% as the clutch pedal is
being released.
8. Make sure the mounting screws are tightened
once the clutch pedal switch is adjusted properly.

SENDER
NOTE: The transmission can be operated in this
mode.
The HC menu displays the temperature transmission
oil in degrees Celsius. To display the transmission oil
temperature, use the following procedure:
manual.

26083
136
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HC” HC
appears on the EST display.
5. After a few seconds the display on the EST will
indicate the temperature of the transmission oil,
in degrees Celsius. An example is: T = 21° C. The
temperature range is --40°C to +120°C (--40°F) to
+248°F).
EST cable to access another menu. 137
HD--HI/LO SYNCHRONIZER OPERATION

NOTE: The transmission should be disabled, but
ensure the range lever is in neutral and the parking
brake is engaged.
The HD menu is used to inspect the operation of the
Forward/Reverse (Hi/Lo--Shuttle) Synchronizer and
will indicate the status of the synchronizer on the EST
display. Use the following procedure to inspect the
F/R synchronizer operation.
switch (1) to the “START” position (C) and start
the engine.
26083
138
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the EST
display. Release the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HD” HD
5. After a few seconds the EST display will indicate
the status of the synchronizers position.
An example is: Pos = Hi/Lo, means the
synchronizer in the rear position ready for
forward travel, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor
pressed, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = SHTL (or SHUT),
the synchronizer is in the front position for 139
reverse travel, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor
pressed, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = UNKN, the ECM is
unsure of what position the synchronizer is in,
because the synchronizer did not engage
properly or is malfunctioning in some way,
normally Error Code 72.
NOTE: In case of failure of one or both synchronizer
position sensor, the message Pos = UNKN could be
displayed even if the synchronizer moves and
engages correctly. In this case, however, the Error
Code selected for the particular position sensor
should appear flashing on the instrument panel.
In normal conditions, the F/R synchronizer should

never be in the mechanical neutral position. If not
following a mechanical or electro-hydraulic problem,
the F/R synchronizer is always meshed with forward
or reverse gear even if the Power Shuttle FNR lever
or clutch pedal are in neutral. Mechanically there is
not a neutral synchronizer position. The Power
Shuttle FNR lever or clutch pedal are causing the
clutch packs to neutralize.
In normal conditions at engine start-up and during

ECM self-diagnosis, the F/R synchronizer is moved
automatically by the ECM to the opposite position
from tractor shut down. For example, if the
synchronizer is in the forward position, then it would
be moved to the reverse position during
self-diagnosis.
6. Increase the engine to 1200 – 1400 RPM and

click the up arrow and down arrow buttons on the
EST to change the position of the synchronizer.
The EST display will indicate the position of the
synchronizer.
7. Change the synchronizer position several times

to be sure the synchronizer is functioning
properly.

HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENTS

The HE menu displays the speed threshold setting.
The ECM uses two shifting tables; one that is used
when the transmission is shifted above the speed
threshold setting; the other is used when the tractor
is shifted below the speed threshold setting. There
are three settings, as listed below.
• Low -- approximately 3 mph
• Med -- approximately 4 mph
• High -- approximately 8 mph
IMPORTANT: This value should not be changed as

it was set at the factory.

manual.
26083
140
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HE” HE 1
5. The display on the EST will indicate one of the
following settings:
• High WST=HI (approx. 8 mph)
• Medium WST=MID (approx. 4 mph)
• Low WST=LOW (approx. 3 mph)
6. To change the engagement speed, click the up
and down buttons (1) on the EST until the desired 141
speed is indicated on the EST display.
store the setting in the ECM.
HF-STORED ERROR CODES

When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECM
non-volatile memory and signalled by the indicator
lamp, (1). The HF menu allows access to Error
Codes that are stored in the non-volatile memory of
the ECM. Stored errors can be read and erased by
using the EST. As soon as a fault condition is
detected by the ECM, the associated Error Code is
saved into the HF memory. Use the following
procedure to access the HF menu:
26304
142
switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
143
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the EST
display. Release the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HF” HF
5. The EST display will indicate the last stored Error
Code. An example would be: E (9) =11.
6. The following key is used for Error Codes:
• E Error
• (9) Progressive storage channel of the
Error
• 11 Error Code number 144
7. The following will be displayed when there are no
Error Codes stored: E (1)=00 There is a
maximum of ten stored Error Codes. E(10) will be
the most recent Error Code.
E (1) = 00 1
NOTE: Do not hold the buttons that change the Error
Code displayed, otherwise the Error Codes may be
erased.
8. If multiple Error Codes are present, use the up

arrow and down arrow buttons (1) to view Error
Codes from other channels. Click them momen-
tarily when changing the Error Code viewed.
9. Stored errors can be erased from the non-volatile
memory by clicking and holding the down arrow 145
button on the EST until the following sequence is
displayed: ERASE 5s, ERASE4s, ERASE 3s,
ERASE 2s, ERASE 1s, ERASED.
NOTE: If the down arrow is released or the button on
the EST cable is pushed during the erasure
countdown, the sequence is cancelled and the Error
Codes are not erased.
10. Release the down button once the errors have

been erased and turn the key switch to the “OFF”
position (A) for at least two seconds.
TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
WARNING other requested calibration operations.
Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and 6. There are two types of faults:
problem--solving easier.
FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be
displayed if the cause has been eliminated or
1. The measurements taken to read: repaired, even without switching off the tractor,
voltage; but the relative code will be saved in the
resistance; non--volatile memory (see HF MENU);
frequency. NO FAULT RESET: the fault remains on the
alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
must be carried out with a digital tester.
solved. To remove the fault display, stop then
restart the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a “no fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see
temperature of 20 o C (68 oF) (ambient temperature). HF MENU.
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the 7. The connection references indicate: the wire
relative resistance values shown in the manual dimension and colour, and the connection pin
should vary accordingly. number.
Example: 0.5 AB (2)
0.5 = wire dimension;
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a AB = wire colour;
resistance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). (2) = connection pin number.
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind
of service operations, check that the specific Electric Wire Color Coding
connections (ECM, sensors, switches, etc.) are A -- Light Blue M -- Brown
correctly connected. B -- White N -- Black
A faulty connection could be the cause of C -- Orange R -- Red
incorrect tractor operation. G -- Yellow S -- Pink
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECM H -- Grey V -- Green
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 307. L -- Blue Z -- Purple
5. If the ECM needs to be replaced, the following 8. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECM connections (85)
operations must be carried out: refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or the
the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the bigger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin
resident non--volatile memory); also check that number.
the self--configuration operation at the first 9. The faults are listed in progressive order starting
start--up (after ECM replacement) is correct; on page 104.
calibration of the hydraulic clutches MENU H1
page 70.
ECM LOCATION
The ECM (1) controls the POWER SHUTTLE.
NOTE: In this manual, the Power Shuttle ECM error codes are divided into two main pages, which face each
other. One page describes the error code and the conditions, causes, test, effects, recovery, and other pertinent
information of the error code, while the second page displays a flow chart for troubleshooting. Becoming familiar
with both the error code description page and the flow chart page, as well as using them together when
performing diagnostic testing on the Power Shuttle, will improve repair capability, and reduce the time spent on
troubleshooting. In addition, a third page identifies the connectors involved with that error code.
FAULT CODE 11 – CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER (1) SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
NOTE: On all Transmissions the Status Lamp (Gear with a Slash) will flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, signal voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 drops below 0.053 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, signal voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 drops below 0.053 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Clutch Pedal
Potentiometer, or between potentiometer terminals, or between Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and ECM
connector 2, pin 24. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between potentiometer and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Potentiometer (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 1 value is below 30 counts.
• H5, doesn’t display transition between d0 and d20.
• HA, doesn’t read the correct percentage.
Effects of Condition 1:
• The Transmission Status Lamp is flashing.
• The clutch pedal doesn’t work.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever.
• An intermittent error is the same as the operator abruptly popping the Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; inching the tractor with the Clutch Pedal is not possible. Tractor can only be moved
using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Depressing the Clutch Pedal will stop the tractor and the error will revert
back to the first Condition.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
NOTE: This error may also cause Error Code 37 and Error Code 48 to activate.
NOTE: The proper operation of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever and/or Clutch Pedal Switch guarantee activation
of the Dump Solenoid in order to safely control the transmission.
FAULT CODE 11
Replace the potentiometer.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect the potentiometer connection
Remove the left--hand panel under the (123).
dashboard. NO Using a digital tester, is the value between NO
Is connection (123) or the clutch pedal po- wires (V) and (N) (potentiometer side with
tentiometer wiring disconnected? the pedal released) ∼ 3.8 kΩ?
YES YES
Connect the connection and/or wiring. Is wire (S) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO
YES
Disconnect the control panel and the con-

nections (137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pin CN2--24 (S)
on connections (137) and connection (123)
on the potentiometer.
Eliminate the cause of the short to ground.
Is there electrical continuity between pin

CN2--24 (S) on connections (137) and con- NO
nection (123) (S) on the potentiometer?
YES
Replace the ECM.
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of

the open circuit.
50025110
FAULT CODE 11
ECM PIN REFERENCE
20007089 CONNECTOR 1 (137A) CONNECTOR 2 (137B)
146
FAULT CODE 11
Tractor Side of Connector Potentiometer Side of Connector

123
0.5 AB (2) 1 C (2)

0.5 S (1) 1 V (1)
0.5 VN (3) 1 N (3)
1 ZB (18)
1 SN (17)
1 GN (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5)
1 GR (4) Empty (11) 137A
1 SG (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 12 – CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER (1) SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT

TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 goes above 0.96 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 goes above 0.96 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Clutch Pedal Potentiometer,
or short to 5v across potentiometer terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and
ECM connector 2, pin 24. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to
12v between potentiometer and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Potentiometer (1).
• Faulty ECM
Tests:
• H9, Channel 1 value is above 545 counts.
• HA, doesn’t read the correct percentage.
• The clutch pedal doesn’t work.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever.
• An intermittent error is the same as the operator abruptly popping the Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; inching the tractor with the Clutch Pedal is not possible. Tractor can only be moved
using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Depressing the Clutch Pedal will stop the tractor and the error will revert
back to the first Condition.
Recovery:
NOTE: This error may also cause Error Code 38 and Error Code 47 to activate.
NOTE: The proper operation of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever and/or Clutch Pedal Switch guarantee activation
of the Dump Solenoid in order to safely control the transmission.
FAULT CODE 12
Replace the potentiometer.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (123) on the poten-
Remove the left--hand panel under the tiometer.
dashboard. NO Using a digital tester, is the value between NO
Is connection (123), or the clutch pedal wires (V) and (N) (potentiometer side with
potentiometer wiring, disconnected? the pedal released) ∼ 3.8 kΩ?
YES YES
Connect the connection and/or wiring. Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Is there electrical continuity between pin NO
CN2--29 (VN) on connections (137) and
connection (123) (VN) on the potentiome-
ter?
YES
Turn the starter key to the OFF position.

Is there a reading of +5V or +12V between NO
CN2--24 (S) on connections (137) and
ground?
YES

the short to +5V or +12V.
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
50025110
FAULT CODE 12
ECM PIN REFERENCE
147
FAULT CODE 12
Tractor Side of Connector Potentiometer Side of Connector

123
0.5 AB (2) 1 C (2)

0.5 S (1) 1 V (1)
0.5 VN (3) 1 N (3)
1 ZB (18)
1 SN (17)
1 GN (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5)
1 GR (4) Empty (11) 137A
1 SG (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 13 – HI AND LO BUTTONS PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY.

NOTE: Error Code is not triggered during clutch pack calibration, H1. Error is only shown on 32x16 transmissions.
NOTE: On a 32 x 16 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a
alternating manner.
Conditions:
• While driving or stationary, both Hi and Lo buttons pressed simultaneously longer than 0.5 seconds.
Causes:
• Operator pressed Hi and Lo Buttons at the same time.
• Hi or Lo Button Switch is stuck closed while the other button is pressed, (broken switch).
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Hi or Lo Button Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 3 or
22, when the opposition button is pressed.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display transition between d0 and d24 for Lo(Turtle) or d25 for Hi(Rabbit).
Effects:
• Speed shift will not take place.
• Transmission operates normally but not when Hi or Lo speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
• Error will self-clear when Condition or Causes stop, but will be stored in HF.
• Cause must be resolved and cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 13

Disassemble the HI and LO pushbuttons Remove the rear right--hand wheel.
knob. Disconnect the HI and LO pushbuttons con-
NO NO
Using a digital tester check the operation nection (87).
of the two pushbuttons. Is there a short circuit between the wires?
Is one of the two buttons in short? YES
YES
Replace the faulty pushbutton. the short circuit.
Replace the ECM.
87
0,5 AV (1)
1 C (2)
0,5 MB (3)
FAULT CODE 14 – MAIN (C1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12
VOLTS.
Conditions:
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes above 4.2 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged, (Wheel
Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch,
or short to 5v volts between switch terminals, or short 5 or 12v between switch and ECM connector 2, pin
4. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and
any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal,
and Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM assumes
position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission is critically
disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes the Dump
Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no error), then
transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle FNR Lever
engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 14
(Gear position sensor X) If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (71) on pushbutton
Remove the rear right--hand wheel and (C1).
check connection (71) on pushbutton NO Position the gear lever in neutral and, using NO
(C1). a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
Is there a short circuit between the wires? ance on the pushbutton.
Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause
of the short circuit. Are wires (GL) and (AB) (wiring side) in
NO
short?
YES

the short circuit between connection (71) on
the pushbutton and pins (C6) and (A7) on
the connection (177).
Does the fault persist?
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--4 (GL)
and CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) with
pins (A7) (GL) and (C6) (AB) on connection
(177).
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit.
Replace the ECM.
71
1 AB (1)
1 GL (2)
FAULT CODE 14
ECM PIN REFERENCE
148
FAULT CODE 14
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
Empty (C5) Empty (C4)

1 AB (C6) Empty (C3)
1 AR (C8) Empty (C1)
177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 AN (B7) Empty (B2)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 15 – MAIN (C1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO GROUND
OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes below 0.7 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes below 0.7 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged, (Wheel
Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Main (C1) Gear Shift
Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 4. Or
common 5 volt supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground or open between Main (C1)
Gear Shift Switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display a transition between d0 and d33.
• Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected.
and Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM assumes
position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission is critically
disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes the Dump
Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no error), then
transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle FNR Lever
engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu 1.
FAULT CODE 15
(Range position sensor X)

Remove the rear right--hand wheel and
check connection (71) on pushbutton NO Connect the wires.
(C1).
Are the relative wires connected?
YES
Position the gear lever in neutral.

Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the pushbutton if interrupted.
cal resistance on the pushbutton.
YES Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Wire (GL) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO Is there electrical continuity between pin NO
YES CN2--4 (GL) on connections (137), pin (A7)
(GL) on connection (177) and connection
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause (71) on the pushbutton?
of the short to ground.
YES

CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137), pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177) and connec-
tion (71) on the pushbutton?
YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
71
1 AB (1)
1 GL (2)
FAULT CODE 15
ECM PIN REFERENCE
149
FAULT CODE 15
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 16 – RANGE (G1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12
VOLTS.
Conditions:
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes above 4.2 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged,
(Wheel Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Range (G1) Gear Shift
Switch, or short to 5 volts between switch terminals, or short 5 or 12v between switch and ECM connector
2, pin 28. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between
switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Range (G1) Gear Shift neutral position can not be detected.
and Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM
assumes position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission
is critically disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes
the Dump Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no
error), then transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle
FNR Lever engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 16
(Range position sensor Y) If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (70) on pushbutton
Remove the rear right--hand wheel and (G1).
check connection (70) on pushbutton NO Position the range lever in neutral and, us-
NO
(G1). ing a digital tester, measure the electrical re-
Is there a short circuit between the wires? sistance on the pushbutton.
YES Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
of the short circuit. Use a digital tester.
Are wires (BG) and (AB) (wiring side) in NO
short?
YES

the short circuit between connection (70) on
pushbutton and pins (B5) (GB) and (C6)
(AB) on connection (177).
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--28
(BG) and CN2--20 (AB) on connections
(137) with pins (B5) (GB) and (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
Replace the ECM.
70
1 BG (2)
1 AB (1)
FAULT CODE 16
ECM PIN REFERENCE
150
FAULT CODE 16
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 17 - RANGE (G1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO
GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes below 0.7 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes below 0.7 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged,
(Wheel Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Range (G1) Gear Shift
Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 28.
Or common 5 volt supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground or open between Range
(G1) Gear Shift Switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Range (G1) Gear Shift neutral position can not be detected.
and Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM
assumes position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission
is critically disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes
the Dump Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no
error), then transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle
FNR Lever engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 17
(Range position sensor Y)

Remove the rear right--hand wheel and
check connection (70) on pushbutton NO Connect the wires.
(G1).
Are the relative wires connected?
YES
Position the gear lever in neutral.

YES Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Is wire (BG) (wiring side) in short to Is there electrical continuity between pin
NO NO
ground? CN2--28 (BG) on connections (137), pin
YES (B5) (BG) on connection (177) and connec-
YES
YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
70
1 BG (2)
1 AB (1)
FAULT CODE 17
ECM PIN REFERENCE
151
FAULT CODE 17
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 18 -- VOLTAGE FROM CREEPER (N) SWITCH (CREEPER LEVER) TOO HIGH.
Conditions/Detection:
• Voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 21 goes above 4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Short circuit to +5 or +12 volts between creeper switch and ECM connector 2, pin 21.
• Short circuit at switch terminals or switch failure.
• ECM failure
Effects:
• Creeper lever neutral position cannot be detected
• The ECM will assume the creeper is engaged and the tractor will attempt to move when the shuttle lever is
in the forward or reverse position and the clutch pedal is raised.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and the error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 18
If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Disconnect connection (227) on the push-

button.
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the
Move the creeper lever to the engaged posi-
solenoid valves unit guard. NO NO
tion.
Check connection (227) on the creeper
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical
pushbutton.
resistance on the pushbutton.
Is there a short circuit between the wires?
YES
YES
of the short circuit. Are wires (HG) and (AB) (wiring side) in
NO
short circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (227)

on pushbutton and pins (C7) (HG) and (C6)
(AB) on connection (177).
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--21
(HG) and CN2--20 (AB) on connections
(137) with pins (C7) (HG) and (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
Replace the ECM.
227
0,5 AB
0,5 HG
FAULT CODE 18
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 19 -- VOLTAGE FROM CREEPER (N) SWITCH (CREEPER LEVER) TOO LOW.
Conditions/Detection:
• Voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 21, goes below 0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Open circuit or short to ground between creeper switch and ECM connector 2, pin 21.
• Open circuit or short to ground between switch terminals or faulty switch.
• ECM failure
Effects:
• Creeper lever neutral position cannot be detected
• The ECM will assume the tractor is in gear and the tractor will attempt to move when the shuttle lever is in
the forward or reverse position and the clutch pedal is raised.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 19
Replace the pushbutton if interrupted.
Disconnect connection (227) on the creeper

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. pushbutton.
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the Move the creeper lever to the engaged posi-
solenoid valves unit guard. NO tion. NO
Check connection (227) and the creeper Using a digital tester, measure the electrical
pushbutton wiring. resistance on the pushbutton.
Is the wiring disconnected? Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
YES
Connect the wiring.
Is wire (HG) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO
YES

the short to ground.

CN2--21 (HG) on connections (137), pin NO
(C7) (HG) on connection (177) and connec-
YES

YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
227
0,5 AB
0,5 HG
FAULT CODE 19
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 21 – CHASSIS HARNESS

NOTE: The 32x16 transmission will use this FAULT CODE for F/R Synchronizer circuit and dump circuit. The
16x16 & 8x8 transmissions will use this FAULT CODE for just the dump circuit.
NOTE: Power Shuttle ECM to PS ECM Harness connected at CN1 and CN2, located under the instrument panel.
PS ECM Harness to PS Transmission Side Harness connected at CN 9 A-D or CN 9 (24 pins), located under
the hood on engine side of firewall. PS Transmission Side Harness to Dump Solenoid and F/R Synchronizer
Position Sensors located on left side of transmission by the Power Shuttle Control Valve.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being driven or in neutral, open circuit between Power Shuttle ECM Harness and Power
Shuttle Transmission Side Harness hinders communication.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; connector between PS ECM Harness and PS Transmission Side Harness disconnected, (at
firewall). Connector between Dump Solenoid and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connector
between F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connector
between F/R Synchronizer Solenoids and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connectors and pins
are pinched, loose, or corroded.
Tests:
• H9, channels related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer
Solenoids will not display the correct count.
• H5, related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer Solenoids
doesn’t display the correct transition between d0 and the corresponding d value.
• HF, would display open circuit FAULT CODEs related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position
Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer Solenoids.
Effects:
• Transmission is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 21

Raise the engine hood. NO Connect connection (177).
Is connection (177) connected?
YES
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the solenoid

valves unit guard. NO Connect the wiring.
Is the wiring on the solenoid valve connected?
YES
Disconnect the control panel. Connect the connections correctly

Are connections (137) on the ECM correctly con- NO
(137).
nected?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 21
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A 137B
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 22 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID COIL SHORT
CIRCUIT.
NOTE: On all transmissions Clutch Pack (A) is the front pack, used for forward movement, controlled by the
bottom, horizontal solenoid on the Power Shuttle Control Valve Assembly. Clutch Pack (B) is the rear pack, used
for reverse movement, controlled by the top, horizontal solenoid on the Power Shuttle Control Valve Assembly.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven in Forward, the Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven in Reverse, the Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between the ECM connector 1, pin 10 and ECM connector 1, pin 6 wires, or
across the two solenoid coil terminals.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-10
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-6 without going through the solenoid coil. PWM Solenoid can
not be electrically controlled to pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate
in Reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 22

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (106) on the clutch sole- NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
noid valve (A). short.
Is the electrical resistance on the solenoid valve
coil, measured with a digital tester, ∼ 10 Ω?
YES
Wires (AR) and (AN) (wiring side) are in short. NO Replace the ECM.
YES
Check the wiring between connection (106) on the

solenoid valve and pins (C8) (AR) and (B7) (AN) on
connection (177).
YES
Disconnect the control panel and the connections

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--10 (AR) and
CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) with pins (C8)
(AR) and (B7) (AN) on connection (177).
106
FAULT CODE 22
ECM PIN REFERENCE
152
FAULT CODE 22
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 23 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID COIL SHORT
CIRCUIT.
NOTE: Two Conditions/Detection will trigger this error code.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven in Reverse, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven in Forward, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and ECM connector 1, pin 5 wires, or across
the two solenoid coil terminals.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Effects of Condition 1:
• Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable; meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-11
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-5 without going through the solenoid coil. PWM Solenoid can
not be electrically controlled to pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate
in Forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 23

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (66) on the clutch solenoid NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
valve (B). short.
Is the electrical resistance on the solenoid valve
YES
Wires (BN) and (BR) (wiring side) are in short. NO Replace the ECM.
YES

solenoid valve and pins (A5) (BN) and (A8) (BR) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--11 (BN) and
CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) with pins (A5)
(BN) and (A8) (BR) on connection (177).
66
FAULT CODE 23
ECM PIN REFERENCE
153
FAULT CODE 23
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 24 – CLUTCH PACK (A) AND (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOIDS
ARE NOT CALIBRATED.
Conditions:
• Clutch Pack Solenoid Calibration Values are out of acceptable range or are not registered.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
Erasure, (H8), using the CDU or EST.
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and B)
PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion of
a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read Only
Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
• H2, doesn’t display calibration values within range 230 to 480 mA.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; feathering with the Clutch Pedal will be poor, jerky, or impossible. Directional
modulation between forward and reverse using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever will be poor, jerky, or
impossible.
• Error code will remain active until a Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1), is completed.
Recovery:
NOTE: This error code will mask Errors Code 28 and Error Code 29 to prevent ECM memory saturation.
FAULT CODE 24
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 26 – ENGINE RPM FREQUENCY SIGNAL TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• For 3 consecutive seconds, the Engine RPM is greater than 3500, with Wheel Speed Sensor indicating
movement, while a Clutch Pack receives full pressure.
Causes:
• Faulty alternator drive belt. Faulty alternator.
• Faulty Engine high idle setting.
• Frequency between alternator W+ terminal and ECM connector 2, pin 15 is too high.
Tests:
• H9, channel 20 is higher than given value.
Effects:
• Unable to conduct Calibration of Clutch Packs (H1).
• Transmission is modified; ECM assumes 2300 Engine RPM, so engine performance may be reduced at other
RPM levels.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF menu.
NOTE: This error will NOT self-clear even if the engine RPM is returned to correct speed.
FAULT CODE 26

Is wire (R) on alternator socket (W) correctly con- NO Connect the wire correctly.
nected?
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1000 rpm (make

sure that the recharging lamp is off).
Replace the alternator if the frequen-
Using a digital tester measure the frequency at the NO
cy value is much higher.
alternator output between la socket (W) and
ground.
Is the frequency ∼ 200 Hz?
YES
Replace the ECM (1).

FAULT CODE 27 – ENGINE RPM FREQUENCY SIGNAL TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• For 3 consecutive seconds, the Engine RPM is less than 500, with Wheel Speed Sensor indicating
movement, while a Clutch Pack receives full pressure.
Causes:
• Faulty Alternator Drive Belt.
• Faulty Alternator.
• Faulty Engine low idle setting.
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between Alternator W+ terminal and ECM connector 2, pin 15, or short to ground
between ECM connector 2, pin 15 and alternator (W+) terminal, or short to 12 volts between ECM connector
2, pin 15 and alternator {W+) terminal.
Tests:
• H9, channel 20 is lower than given value.
Effects:
• Unable to conduct Calibration of Clutch Packs (H1)
• Transmission is modified; ECM assumes 2300 Engine RPM, so engine performance may be reduced at other
RPM levels.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF menu.
NOTE: This error will NOT clear even if the engine RPM is throttle down to correct speed.
FAULT CODE 27
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Replace the lamp bulb.
NO
Is the alternator recharge lamp ON?
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 Check the recharge system.
rpm. NO
Is the recharge lamp OFF?
YES
YES
Is wire (R) on the alternator socket (W) Connect the wire correctly
NO
correctly connected?
YES
Is the alternator socket (W) wire (R) in

NO
short to ground?
YES

YES
Bring engine speed to 1000 rpm.

Using a digital tester, measure the fre-
quency at the alternator output between
the socket (W) and ground. NO Replace the alternator.
Is the frequency ∼ 200 Hz?
YES

the open circuit.
CN2--15 (R) (wiring side) and the alterna-
tor socket (W)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 27
ECM PIN REFERENCE
154
FAULT CODE 27
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
85A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
85B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 0.5 S (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 28 – CLUTCH PACK (B) NOT CALIBRATED.

NOTE: This error code will not be displayed during clutch calibration procedure, (H1). “U” codes are used during
H1 procedure for notification of incorrect calibration values. Use the CDU or EST tool to access the H1 menu.
Conditions:
• While key switch is in the “ON” position the ECM detects that the Clutch Pack (B) is not calibrated.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and
B) PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion
of a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack (B) Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read
Only Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Reverse will be affected by the poor performance of Clutch Pack (B).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 28
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 29 – CLUTCH PACK (A) NOT CALIBRATED.

NOTE: This error code will not be displayed during clutch calibration procedure, (H1). “U” codes are used during
H1 procedure for notification of incorrect calibration values. Use the CDU or EST tool to access the H1 menu.
Conditions:
• While key switch is in the “ON” position the ECM detects that the Clutch Pack (A) is not calibrated.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and
B) PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion
of a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack (A) Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read
Only Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Forward will be affected by the poor performance of Clutch Pack (A).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 29
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 31 – REVERSE (SHUTTLE) SYNCHRONIZER SOLENOID COIL SHORT

CIRCUIT.
NOTE: Error is only for 32x16. The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will
flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in reverse the Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 17 and ECM connector 1, pin 3 wires, or across
the two coil terminals.
• Faulty Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 13 value is below 0 counts.
• Transmission is limited; Reverse Side of the F/R Synchronizer Piston becomes inoperable; meaning the
solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the piston. If the Synchronizer was already in
the reverse position then the tractor will move in reverse. But once the Synchronizer is moved into the forward
position it will not be able to shift it back into reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 31

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (65) on the Shuttle syn- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
chroniser solenoid valve. short.
Is the solenoid valve coil electrical resistance,
measured with a digital tester, ∼ 7 Ω?
YES
Are wires (SN) and (SG) (wiring side) in short cir-

NO Replace the ECM.
cuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B4) (SN) and (C4) (SG) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--17 (SN) and
CN1--3 (SG) on connections (137) with pins (B4)
(SN) and (C4) (SG) on connection (177).
FAULT CODE 31
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
137B
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 32 – FORWARD (HI-LO) SYNCHRONIZER SOLENOID COIL SHORT CIRCUIT.

NOTE: Error is only for 32x16. The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will
flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward the Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 16 and ECM connector 1, pin 4 wires, or across
• Faulty Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 12 value is below 0 counts.
• Transmission is limited; Forward Side of the F/R Synchronizer Piston becomes inoperable; meaning the
solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the piston. If the Synchronizer was already in
the Forward position then the tractor will move in forward. But once the Synchronizer is moved into the
Reverse position it will not be able to shift it back into forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 32

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (68) on the Shuttle syn- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
chroniser solenoid valve. short.
Is the electrical resistance of the solenoid valve
YES
Are wires (GN) and (GR) (wiring side) in short

NO Replace the ECM.
circuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B2) (GN) and (C1) (GR)
on connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--16 (GN) and
CN1--4 (GR) on connections (137) with pins (B2)
(GN) and (C1) (GR) on connection (177).
68
FAULT CODE 32
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
137B
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 33 – DUMP SOLENOID COIL SHORT CIRCUIT.

Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse the Dump Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Dump Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and ECM connector 1, pin 2 wires, or across
• Faulty Dump Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• No H Menu for diagnostic check.
• Transmission is limited; Dump Solenoid stays energized, meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-18
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-2 without going through the solenoid coil. The Clutch Packs (A
or B) can not be hydraulically de-pressurised. Transmission will still operate by using other Clutch Pack
solenoids to bleed off hydraulic pressure when shuttle or speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 33

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (67) on the dump solenoid Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
valve. short.
Is the electrical resistance of the solenoid valve
YES
Are wires (ZB) and (ZN) (wiring side) in short cir-

NO Replace the ECM.
cuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B8) (ZB) and (B3) (ZN) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--18 (ZB) and
CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) with pins (B8)
(ZB) and (B3) (ZN) on connection (177).
67
1 ZN
1 ZB
FAULT CODE 33
ECM PIN REFERENCE
155
FAULT CODE 33
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 35 – DUMP SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse, the Dump Solenoid becomes energized by a short to
12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and the solenoid coil terminal, or
across solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 2 and solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is shorted to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
• Dump Solenoid short circuit to 12 volts instead of being 0 volts; therefore keeping the Dump Solenoid
energized which causes Clutch Pack (A or B) to be de-pressurized.
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 35

nections (137) on the ECM. Is there a reading of +12V between pin
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) (wiring NO
Is there a reading of +12V between pin side) and ground?
CN1--18 (ZB) on connections (137) (wir- YES
ing side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--2 (ZN) on
connections (137), pin (B3) (ZN) on connec-
Check the wiring between pin CN1--18 tion (177) and connection (67) on the sole-
(ZB) on connections (137), pin (B8) (ZB) noid valve.
on connection (177) and connection (67)
on the solenoid valve.
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to
+12V. Replace the ECM.
67
1 ZN
1 ZB
FAULT CODE 35
ECM PIN REFERENCE
156
FAULT CODE 35
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 36 – DUMP SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR

ECM DRIVER OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse, the Dump Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Dump Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and the solenoid coil terminal,
or across the two coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 2 and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; Dump Solenoid stays de-energized. The Clutch Packs (A or B) can not be
hydraulically de-pressurized. Transmission will still operate by using other Clutch Pack solenoids to bleed
off hydraulic pressure when shuttle or speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 36

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (67) on the dump Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
solenoid valve. rupted.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri-
cal resistance of the solenoid valve coil.
Is the resistance ∼ 7.5 Ω?
YES
Is wire (ZB) on the solenoid valve wiring in NO nections (137) on the ECM.
NO
short to ground? Is wire (ZN) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES short to ground?
YES
of the short to ground?
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect con-

nection (177).
(B8) (ZB) and connection (67) on the sole-
noid valve?
YES
67
NO
(B3) (ZN) and connection (67) on the sole-
noid valve?
YES

CN1--18 (ZB) on connections (137) and pin
(B8) (ZB) on connection (177)? NO
1 ZN
YES
1 ZB Is there electrical continuity between pin
CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(B3) (ZN) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 36
ECM PIN REFERENCE
157
FAULT CODE 36
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 37 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) OPEN CIRCUIT.

NOTE: This error may be triggered by Error Code 11.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal is released, (switch closed), the Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is above 30%,
while Power Shuttle FNR Lever is not in neutral, (Voltage is being supplied to ECM connector 2, pin 18), and
with 12 volts not present at ECM connector 1, pin 15.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between ECM connector 1, pin 15 and Clutch Pedal Switch.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1).
• Clutch Pedal Switch (1) is sticking, (cold weather condition).
• Clutch Pedal Switch (1) is miss adjusted.
Tests:
• H9, channel 4 is too low.
• H5, does not change from “d0” to “d21”.
• HA, doesn’t display correct values.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Clutch Pedal.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 37
(Clutch pedal double switch 1)

Remove the left--hand panel under the dashboard. Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is connection (121) and/or the switch wiring con- NO
nected?
YES
Disconnect connection (121) on the switch.

Using a digital tester, check the double switch. NO Replace the switch.
Does it work?
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring and eliminate the
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN1--15 NO
cause of the open circuit.
(RN) on connections (137) and connection (121)
on the switch?
YES
Replace the ECM.
50025110
FAULT CODE 37
ECM PIN REFERENCE
158
FAULT CODE 37
121
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
85A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
85B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 38 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID OR ECM
DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being operated the Clutch Pack (B) Pulse Width Modulated Solenoid becomes energized by
a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and the solenoid coil terminal or
Tests:
• H9, Channel 7 value stays constant and is above 480 counts.
Effects:
• The Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid Coil remains energized, keeping clutch engaged. Non authorized 12 volt
can only be stopped by activating the Dump Solenoid, (neutral PS FNR Lever or depressed Clutch Pedal).
The transmission is disabled to ensure the operator is not placed in a dangerous situation where the tractor
can not be stopped.
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off tractor).
Recovery:
Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 38

Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) (wiring NO
CN1--11 (11) (BN) on connections (137) YES
(wiring side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--5 (BR) on
connections (137), pin (A8) (BR) on connec-
(BN) on connections (137), pin (A5) (BN) noid valve.
66
FAULT CODE 38
ECM PIN REFERENCE
159
FAULT CODE 38
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 39 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven Reverse, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven Forward, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and the solenoid coil
terminal, or across the two solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 5 and the solenoid coil
terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 7 value is below 200 counts
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not
hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate in Forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 39
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the the open circuit.
Disconnect connection (66) on the clutch
solenoid valve (B). Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- rupted.
YES
Is wire (BN) on the solenoid valve wiring in nections (137) on the ECM.
NO NO
short to ground? Is wire (BR) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES
nection (177).
(A5) (BN) and connection (66) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES
66 Is there electrical continuity between pin
(A8) (BR) and connection (66) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES

CN1--11 (BN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(A5) (BN) on connection (177)?
YES

CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) and pin NO
(A8) (BR) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 39
ECM PIN REFERENCE
160
FAULT CODE 39
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 41 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVE OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven Lo-Forward, the Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid has a short to
ground or open circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven Hi-Forward or Reverse, the Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid has
a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 10 and the solenoid coil terminal,
or across the two solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 6 and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 8 value is below 200 counts
• Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and
de-pressurize the Clutch Pack.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not
hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate in Hi-Forward or
Reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 41
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the the open circuit.
Disconnect connection (106) on the Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
clutch solenoid valve (A). rupted.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri-
YES
Is wire (AR) on the solenoid valve wiring in nections (137) on the ECM.
NO NO
short to ground? Is wire (AN) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES

nection (177).
(C8) (AR) and connection (106) on the sole-
noid valve?
106 YES

(B7) (AN) and connection (106) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES

CN1--10 (AR) on connections (137) and pin
(C8) (AR) on connection (177)? NO
YES

CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(B7) (AN) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 41
ECM PIN REFERENCE
161
FAULT CODE 41
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 42 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID OR ECM
DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being operated the Clutch Pack (A) Pulse Width Modulated Solenoid becomes energized by
a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 10 and the solenoid coil terminal or
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 8 value stays constant and is above 480 counts.
Effects:
• The Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil remains energized, keeping clutch engaged. Non authorized 12 volt
can only be stopped by activating the Dump Solenoid, (neutral PS FNR Lever or depressed Clutch Pedal).
The transmission is disabled to ensure the operator is not placed in a dangerous situation where the tractor
can not be stopped.
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 42

Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) (wiring NO
CN1--10 (AR) on connections (137) (wir- YES
ing side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--6 (AN) on
connections (137), pin (B7) (AN) on connec-
(AR) on connections (137), pin (C8) (AR) noid valve.
106
FAULT CODE 42
ECM PIN REFERENCE
162
FAULT CODE 42
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 43 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) POSITION SWITCH (T) SIGNAL

VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
NOTE: On a 32x16 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a
alternating manner. On 16x16 & 8x8 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Gear with a Slash lamp. It will flash.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switches
are located on the left side of the transmission between the Power Shuttle Control Valve and the Service Control
Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is toward the rear of the tractor. The Synchronizer
Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is toward the front of the tractor.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the reverse position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; short to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse)
Position Switch, or short to 5 v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12 v between Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 23. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM
connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch (T).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is above 860 counts.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27”.
• HD displays “unkn”.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is available (forward movement).
Any shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into
reverse position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch and move
synchronizer to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 43

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (60) on pushbutton. NO If in short, replace the pushbutton.
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
ance on the pushbutton.
Is the resistance 500 to 3000 Ω?
YES
Are wires (AB) and (HL) (wiring side) in short

NO Replace the ECM.
circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (60) on

pushbutton, pin (C3) (HL) and pin (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pin CN2--23 (HL) on
connections (137) and pin (C3) (HL) on connection
(177) or between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin (C6)
(AB).
60
0,5 AB
0,5 HL
FAULT CODE 43
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12) 137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 44 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) POSITION SWITCH (T) SIGNAL

VOLTAGE IS SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
NOTE: On a 32x16 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a
alternating manner. On 16x16 & 8x8 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Gear with a Slash lamp. It will flash.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the reverse position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is below
0.7 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is below
0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Position Switch, or between switch terminals, or between Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 23. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20
is shorted to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch (T).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is below 143 counts.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enable by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is available (forward movement).
Any shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into
reverse position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch and move
synchronizer to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 44

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is the wiring and connection (60) on the
pushbutton connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (60) on the push-

button.
YES Raise the engine hood.
Disconnect connection (177).
Is wire (HL) (wiring side) in short to
NO Is there electrical continuity between con- NO
ground?
nection (60) on pushbutton (HL) and pin
YES
(C3) (HL) on connection (177)?
Disconnect the control panel and connec- YES
tions (137) on the ECM.
Check the wiring between connection Is there electrical continuity between con-
(60), pin (C3) (HL) on connection (177) nection (60) on pushbutton (AB) and pin NO
and pin CN2--23 (HL) on connections (C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
(137). YES
Disconnect the control panel and connec-
CN2--23 (HL) on connections (137) and pin
(C3) (HL) on connection (177)?
YES

CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

60
0,5 AB
0,5 HL
FAULT CODE 44
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12) 137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 46 – FUSE ERROR

NOTE: This fuse protects the ECM connector 2, pin 1 circuit. The actual fuse number is 15. The circuit is keyed
12 volts. The fuse is a 5 amp.
Conditions:
• When tractor on, ECM detects voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 1 is low while voltage at ECM connector 2,
pin 10 is high.
Cause:
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between battery and key switch or between key switch and fuse, or across fuse,
or between fuse and ECM connector 2, pin 1.
• Faulty Fuse.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 15 is below 428.
• H5, won’t show “d20”.
Effects:
• Transmission will be limited; ECM Calibration/Diagnostic Unit (CDU) or Electronic Service Tool (EST) will not
work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 46

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. nections (137) on the ECM.
Remove the left--hand guard located un- Turn the starter key to the ON position.
der the control panel. NO
Is there a reading of +12V between pin NO
Is fuse F15 (Section 55, Chapter 5) CN2--21 (HG) on connections (137) and
blown? ground?
YES YES
Replace the fuse. Replace the ECM.

and the fusebox.
Eliminate the cause of the open circuit.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 47 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) SET TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is above 15%, while the Power Shuttle FNR lever not in
neutral, (ECM connector 2, pin 18 should have 12 volts), with the clutch pedal released and the clutch pedal
switch isn’t open, (ECM connector 1, pin 15 should have 12 volts).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; open circuit between Power Shuttle FNR Lever, (neutral switch) and ECM connector 1, pin 15,
(Error Code 37, when pedal is released).
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1). (Error Code 37, when pedal is released).
• Improperly adjusted switch (1).
Tests:
• H9, channel 1 is higher than 542 during release.
• HA, during clutch pedal release, the Clutch Pedal Switch (1) changes from off to on after 15%.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; clutch pedal inching maneuver may be jerky and occur at a higher clutch pedal
position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 47

Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Connect the CDU or EST to the diagnosis
socket (black), press the H MENU button
on the CDU or the EST cable, and turn the Remove the left--hand panel under the
starter switch to the ON position, then se- dashboard. NO
NO
lect the HA MENU. Is the wiring and connection (121) con-
Move the Shuttle lever to forward gear nected?
and fully press down the clutch pedal. YES
When the clutch pedal is released, the
message switches from “OFF” to “ON”? Disconnect connection (121) on the switch
YES and check. NO
Does it work?
YES

CN1--15 (RN) on connections (137) and
connection (121) on the switch?
YES
Remove the left--hand panel under the

Press the clutch pedal fully down and re- dashboard.
lease slowly. Position the double switch on the relative
The message switches from “OFF” a “ON” NO slots, so that the message switches be-
in correspondence to a percentage value tween “OFF” and “ON” in correspondence to
of 10 to 15? a set value (10 to 15 %).
YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
Replace the switch.
50025110
FAULT CODE 47
ECM PIN REFERENCE
163
FAULT CODE 47
121
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 48 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) SET TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is below 5%, while the Power Shuttle FNR lever in neutral,
(ECM connector 2, pin 18 shouldn’t have 12 volts), with the clutch pedal depressed and the clutch pedal
switch is open, (ECM connector 1, pin 15 shouldn’t have 12 volts).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between Power Shuttle FNR Lever, (neutral switch) and ECM connector
1, pin 15.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1).
• Improperly adjusted / sticky switch (1).
Tests:
• H9, channel 1 is lower than 38 during depression.
• HA, during clutch pedal depression, the Clutch Pedal Switch (1) changes from on to off after 5%.
Effects:
• No effect to normal operation except using the clutch pedal will not neutralize the transmission, (de-energize
the clutch pack solenoids). The Power Shuttle FNR Lever will have to be used to make tractor move.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 48
Connect the CDU or EST to the diagnosis socket

(black), press the H MENU button on the CDU or
Remove the left--hand panel under
the EST cable, and turn the starter switch to the ON
the dashboard.
position, then select the HA MENU.
Position the double switch on the rel-
Move the Shuttle lever to forward gear. NO ative slots, so that the message
Press and release the clutch pedal, the percentage
switches between “ON” and “OFF” in
value displayed is∼ 100 with the “ON” message.
correspondence to a set value (5 to
By slowly pressing the clutch pedal, the message
8%).
switches from “ON” to “OFF” in correspondence to
a percentage value of 5 to 8?
YES
Replace the ECM.
50025110
FAULT CODE 49 – WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (Aa) VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage is above 4.25 volts at ECM connector 2, pin 36.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 36 and Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa)
terminal, or short to 5v across sensor terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa) and
ECM connector 2, pin 29.
• Faulty Wheel Speed Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display “d35”.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Power Shuttle FNR lever may not shuttle directions correctly. Acceleration or
tractor movement may not be sensed by ECM during Automatic Take Off (ATO).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 49

Remove the rear left--hand wheel. NO Connect the connection and/or
Is connection (61) and the sensor wiring con- wiring.
nected?
YES
Disconnect sensor connection (61).

Using a digital tester, measure the sensor electrical
NO Replace the sensor if interrupted.
resistance.
YES
Raise the engine hood.

Is there electrical continuity between connection Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
(61) (HB) on the sensor and pin (B3) (HB) on con- cause of the open circuit.
nection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between connection

(61) (VN) on the sensor and pin (A4) (VN) on con- NO
nection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Is there electrical continuity between pin (B3) (HB) NO
on connection (177) and pin CN2--36 (HB) on con-
nections (137)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin (A4) (VN)

on connection (177) and pin CN2--29 (VN) on con- NO
nections (137)?
YES
Turn the starter key to the ON position.

Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--29 NO Replace the ECM.
(VN) (wiring side) on connections (137) and
ground?
YES (Speed sensor Aa)
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of the
short to +12V.
61
FAULT CODE 49
ECM PIN REFERENCE
164
FAULT CODE 49
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 51 – TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENDER (Bb) OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 25 and Transmission Temperature
Sender terminal, or short to 5v across sender terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Transmission
Temperature Sender and ECM connector 2, pin 29, or open circuit between Transmission Temperature
Sender and ECM connector 2, pin 25.
• Faulty Transmission Oil Temperature Sender (Bb).
• Faulty ECM.
• Temperature is below --40_C (--40_F).
Tests:
• H5, won’t show “d29” if Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb) is disconnected.
• HC, won’t show an accurate temperature.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; extreme low temperature is assumed so clutch pack pressures will be low, resulting
in sluggish operation and clutch pedal inching occurs at a higher level. Error may be self-resolved as voltage
reaches normal range, [once the transmission oil temperature warms up, above --30_C (--22_F)].
Recovery:
• If temperature increases but error remains, then cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using
the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 51

NO Connect the connection and/or
valves unit guard.
wiring.
Is connection (107) and the sensor wiring con-
nected?
YES
Disconnect sensor connection (107).

Using a digital tester, measure the sensor electrical
resistance. NO Replace the sensor if interrupted.
With the oil temperature at 20°C (68°F), is the re-
sistance ∼ 500 Ω?
YES
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect connection

(177). Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
Is there electrical continuity between connection cause of the open circuit.
(107) (HM) on the sensor and pin (A2) (HM) (trans-
mission side) on connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between connection

NO
(107) (VN) on the sensor and pin (B6) (VN) on con-
nection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Is there electrical continuity between pin (A2) (HM) NO
on connection (177) and pin CN2--25 (HM) on con-
nections (137)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin (B6) (VN)

on connection (177) and pin CN2--29 (VN) on con- NO
nections (137)?
YES
Turn the starter key to the ON position.

Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--25 NO Replace the ECM.
(HM) (wiring side) on connections (137) and
ground? (Transmission oil temperature sensor Bb)
YES

short to +12V.
107
FAULT CODE 51
ECM PIN REFERENCE
165
FAULT CODE 51
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 52 – TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENDER (Bb) SHORT CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage is below 0.34 volts at ECM connector 2, pin 25.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground between ECM connector 2, pin 25 and Transmission Temperature
Sender, or across sender terminals, or between Transmission Temperature Sender and ECM connector 2,
pin 29.
• Faulty Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb).
• Faulty ECM.
• Transmission oil temperature is above 130_C (266_F).
Tests:
• H5, won’t show “d29” if Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb) is disconnected.
• HC, won’t show an accurate temperature.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; extreme high temperature is assumed so clutch pack pressures will be low
resulting in sluggish operation and clutch pedal inching occurs at a higher level. Error may be self-resolved
as voltage reaches normal range, [once the transmission oil temperature cools down, below 130_C (266_F)].
Recovery:
• If temperature decreases but error remains, then cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using
the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 52
Replace the sensor if in short.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect sensor connection (107).
Remove the rear left--hand wheel. Using a digital tester, measure the sensor
NO electrical resistance. NO
Is connection (107) and the temperature
sensor wiring in short? With the oil temperature at 20° C (68° F), is
the resistance ∼ 500 Ω?
YES
YES
of the short circuit. Disconnect the control panel and the con-
NO
Is wire (HM) on sensor connection (107) in
short to ground?
YES
Check the wiring between sensor connec-

tion (107), pin (A2) (HM) on connection
(177) and pin CN2--25 (HM) on connections
(137).
YES
Replace the ECM.
(Transmission oil temperature sensor Bb)
107
FAULT CODE 52
ECM PIN REFERENCE
166
FAULT CODE 52
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 53 – 5 VOLTS SENSOR SUPPLY SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and any other 5 volt sensor, [Clutch
Pedal Potentiometer, Power Shuttle FNR lever, Main (C1) Gear and Range (G1) Gear Position Switches.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
• This error may be displayed instead of showing errors for the different individual circuits.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 53

(137) on the ECM. NO Replace the ECM.
Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--20
(AB) (wiring side) and ground?
YES

short on pin CN2--20 (AB) to +12V.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 54 – 5 VOLTS SENSOR SUPPLY SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and any other 5 volt sensor, [Clutch
Pedal Potentiometer, Power Shuttle FNR lever, Main (C1) Gear and Range (G1) Gear Position Switches.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
• This error may be displayed instead of showing errors for the different circuits.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 54

Is pin CN2--20 (AB) (wiring side) in short to ground?
YES
Check the sensors voltage wire (AB) on the wiring:

Shuttle lever, clutch pedal potentiometer, forward
and reverse gear synchroniser position pushbut-
ton, range and gear neutral position sensor push-
buttons and the creeper position sensor pushbut-
ton.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 55 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) FORWARD POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Forward
Position Switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between PS FNR Lever Forward
Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 26. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector
2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Forward Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, won’t display “d22”.
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the forward position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Reverse Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 55

(137) on the ECM. Replace the Shuttle lever if a short
When the Shuttle lever (1) is positioned in forward NO circuit is found.
gear, between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin CN2--26
(AN) (wiring side), is the reading ∼ 600 Ω?
YES
Replace the ECM.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 55
ECM PIN REFERENCE
167
FAULT CODE 55
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 56 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) FORWARD POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever
Forward Position Switch, or across switch terminals, or between PS FNR Lever (1) Forward Position Switch
and ECM connector 2, pin 26. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted
to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Forward Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the forward position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever (1) Neutral and Reverse Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 56

Disconnect the control panel and the con- Is there electrical continuity between
nections (137) on the ECM. NO CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and NO
Is wire (AN) on pin CN2--26 in short to connection (151) (AB) on the Shuttle lever?
ground? YES
YES
Is there electrical continuity between
Check the wiring between pin CN2--26 CN2--26 (AN) on connections (137) and NO
(AN) on connections (137) and connec- connection (151) (AN) on the Shuttle lever?
tion (151) on the Shuttle lever. YES
Replace the Shuttle lever.
YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 56
ECM PIN REFERENCE
168
FAULT CODE 56
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
151
0,5 A (4)
0,5 AN (5)
0,5 AB (6)
0,5 MN (3)
0,5 HV (2)
0,5 B (1)
FAULT CODE 57 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) REVERSE POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 27. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector
2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty and PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the reverse position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Forward Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 57

(137) on the ECM.
Replace the Shuttle lever if a short
Move the Shuttle lever to the reverse gear position, NO
circuit is found.
between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin CN2--27 (A) on
connections (137) (wiring side), is the reading
∼ 600 Ω?
YES
Replace the ECM.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 57
ECM PIN REFERENCE
169
FAULT CODE 57
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 58 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) REVERSE POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch, or between switch terminals, or between PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch and ECM
connector 2, pin 27. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the reverse position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Forward Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 58

Disconnect the control panel and the con- Is there electrical continuity between
nections (137) on the ECM. NO CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and NO
Is wire (A) on pin CN2--27 in short to connection (151) (AB) on the Shuttle lever?
ground? YES
YES
Is there electrical continuity between
Check the wiring between pin CN2--27 (A) CN2--27 (A) on connections (137) and con- NO
on connections (137) and connection nection (151) (AN) on the Shuttle lever?
(151) on the Shuttle lever. YES
Replace the Shuttle lever.
YES
Replace the ECM.

the open circuit.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 58
ECM PIN REFERENCE
170
FAULT CODE 58
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
151
0,5 A (4)
0,5 AN (5)
0,5 AB (6)
0,5 MN (3)
0,5 HV (2)
0,5 B (1)
FAULT CODE 59 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) NEUTRAL, FORWARD, & REVERSE
POSITION SWITCHES DISAGREE.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that two or none of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever Position Switches, (Neutral, Forward,
or Reverse) are activated at the same time.
Causes:
• A particular position switch could be sticking, for example inputs could be indicated for two switches
simultaneously, (both neutral and forward, both neutral and reverse, both forward and reverse, and nothing
from neutral, forward, or reverse).
• Faulty wiring; open circuit between ECM connector 2, pin 18 and Power Shuttle FNR Lever Neutral Position
Switch.
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Neutral Switch (1).
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch (1).
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 9 and 10 are out of range.
• H5, won’t show “d22” or “d23”.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Any voltages
recorded out of range will result in displaying separate error codes.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 59
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 61 – VOLTAGE FROM SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) POSITION SWITCH

(S) SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
NOTE: The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a alternating
manner.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the forward position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is above
4.2 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward)
Position switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 2. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM
connector 2, pin 20 is short to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch (S).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is available (reverse
movement). Any shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR
is put into forward position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and move synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 61

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (105) on pushbutton (HI If in short circuit, replace the pushbut-
NO
and LO) (grey connection). ton.
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
ance on the pushbutton.
YES
Are wires (AB) and (HV) (wiring side) in short cir- Replace the ECM.
NO
cuit?
YES YES
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect connection Check the wiring between pins (A3)
(177). (HV) and (C6) (AB) on connection
NO (177) with pins CN2--2 (HV) and
Are wires (AB) and (HV) still in short?
CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137)
YES
on the ECM.
Check the wiring between pin (A3) (HV) on connec- Does the fault persist?
tion (177) or between pin (C6) (AB) on connection
(177) and connection (105) on pushbutton.
105
0,5 AB
0,5 HV
FAULT CODE 61
1 SB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 PC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG. (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 PVC (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 FN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG. (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 62 – VOLTAGE FROM SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) POSITION SWITCH

(S) SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
manner.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the forward position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is below
0.7 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is below
0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Position Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position
Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 2. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is
short to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is available (reverse
movement). Any shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR
is put into forward position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and move synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 62

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is the wiring and connection (105) on the
pushbutton connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (97*) on the push-

button.
YES
Raise the engine hood.
Is wire (HV) on connection (105) in short Disconnect connection (177).
NO Is there electrical continuity between con- NO
to ground?
YES
nection (105) on pushbutton (HV) and pin
(A3) (HV) on connection (177)?
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause YES
Is there electrical continuity between con-
nection (105) on pushbutton (AB) and pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
YES
Disconnect the control panel and connec-

CN2--2 (HV) on connections (137) and pin
(A3) (HV) on connection (171)?
YES
Replace the ECM.
105
0,5 AB (1)
0,5 HV (2)
FAULT CODE 62
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 63 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DID NOT MOVE INTO THE HI-LO (FORWARD)
POSITION.
NOTE: This is the same as the synchronizer not disengaging from reverse.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Synchronizer is located on the
left side of the transmission behind the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) position
is toward the front of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) position is toward the rear of the tractor.
Conditions:
• During directional change (a shuttle), moving the PS FNR Lever to forward position, the F/R Synchronizer
did not engage the forward position within the time allowed.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer linkage.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 is not within allowable range.
Effects:
• Once the error has been cleared, the ECM will attempt to put the F/R Synchronizer into the Hi-Lo (Forward)
position again. This error will be triggered until an attempt to shift the F/R Synchronizer into forward position
has been successful.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 63

valves unit guard.
Replace the HI and LO forward gears synchroniser
position sensor pushbutton.
YES
Replace the HI and LO forward gears synchroniser

solenoid valve.
YES
Check the hydraulic system, the synchroniser unit

and eliminate the fault.
FAULT CODE 64 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DID NOT MOVE INTO THE SHUTTLE (REVERSE)
POSITION.
NOTE: This is the same as the synchronizer not disengaging from forward.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Synchronizer is located on the
left side of the transmission behind the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) position
is toward the front of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) position is toward the rear of the tractor.
Conditions:
• During directional change (a shuttle), moving the PS FNR Lever to reverse position, the F/R Synchronizer
did not engage the reverse position within the time allowed.
Causes:
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer linkage.
• Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is not within allowable range.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Once the error has been cleared, the ECM will attempt to put the F/R Synchronizer into the Shuttle (Reverse)
position again. This error will be triggered until an attempt to shift the F/R Synchronizer into reverse position
has been successful.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 64

valves unit guard.
Replace the Shuttle reverse synchroniser position
sensor pushbutton.
YES
Replace the Shuttle synchroniser position solenoid

valve.
YES
Check the hydraulic system, the synchroniser unit

and eliminate the fault.
FAULT CODE 65 – SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) SOLENOID CIRCUIT SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER IS OPEN.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoids are
located on the bottom of the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid is toward
the rear of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid is toward the front of the tractor. Both solenoids
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
2. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between the ECM connector 1, pin 16 and solenoid coil
terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals or between solenoid coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin
4.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, channel 12 is not within range.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid is available (reverse movement). Any
shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into forward
position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid and move
synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 65

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect connection.
Is connection (68) on the HI and LO for-
ward gear synchroniser position control
solenoid valve connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (68) on the sole-

noid valve.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the solenoid valve if interrupted.
YES

Is wire (GN) on pin CN1--16 on connec- Is there electrical continuity between pin
NO CN1--16 (GN) on connections (137) and NO
tions (137) or wire (GR) on pin CN1--4 in
short to ground? connection (68) on the solenoid valve?
YES YES
Check the wiring between connection (68) Is there electrical continuity between pin
CN1--4 (GR) on connections (137) and con- NO
on the solenoid valve, pins (B2) (GN) and
(C1) (GR) on connection (177) and pins nection (68) on the solenoid valve?
CN1--16 (GN) and CN1--4 (GR) on con- YES
nections (137).
Eliminate the cause of the short to ground. Replace the ECM.
68
FAULT CODE 65
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 66 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) SOLENOID CIRCUIT SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER IS OPEN.
manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
2. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between the ECM connector 1, pin 17 and the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals, or between the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 3.
• Faulty ECM, internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid is available (forward movement). Any
shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into reverse
position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid and move synchronizer
to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 66

the open circuit.
Is connection (65) on the solenoid valve of NO Connect connection.
the Shuttle reverse synchroniser position
control connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (65) on the sole-

noid valve.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the solenoid valve if interrupted.
YES

nections (137) on the ECM. Is there electrical continuity between pin
Is wire (SN) on pin CN1--17 on connec- NO CN1--17 (SN) on connections (137) and NO
tions (137) or Wire (SG) on pin CN1--3 in connection (65) on the solenoid valve?
short to ground? YES
YES
Check the wiring between connection (65) CN1--3 (GS) on connections (137) and con- NO
on the solenoid valve, pins (B4) (SN) and nection (65) on the solenoid valve?
(C4) (GS) on connection (177) and pins YES
CN1--17 (SN) and CN1--3 (GS) on con-
nections (137). Replace the ECM.
FAULT CODE 66
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 67 – SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER IS

SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid becomes energized by a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between the ECM connector 1, pin 16 and the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals, or between the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 4.
• Faulty ECM, internal ECM Driver is shorted to
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is limited; Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid remains energized, therefore keeping F/R
Synchronizer Piston in forward position. Only forward engagement is operational. Hi-Lo speed engagement
is operational. Any shuttle into reverse will not work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 67

(GN) on connections (137) and ground?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN1--16 (GN) on

connections (137), pin (B2) (GN) on connection
(177) and connection (68) on the solenoid valve.
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to +12V.
68
FAULT CODE 67
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 68 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER IS

SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid become energized by a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between the ECM connector 1, pin 17 and the Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminal, or between the Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 3.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is short to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is limited; Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid remains energized, therefore keeping F/R
Synchronizer Piston in reverse position. Only reverse engagement is operational. Hi-Lo speed engagement
is applicable with reverse. Any shuttle into forward will not work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 68

(SN) on connections (137) and ground?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN1--17 (SN) on

connections (137), pin (B4) (SN) on connection
(177) and connection (65) on the solenoid valve.
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to +12V.
FAULT CODE 68
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 69 – WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (Aa) SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 36 is below 1.8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 36 and Wheel Speed Sensor
(Aa), or across sensor terminals.
• Faulty Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 19, is not within range.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Power Shuttle FNR Lever may not work properly. No acceleration feedback
monitored during automatic take-off (ATO).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 69

Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect
connection (177). NO NO
Is pin CN2--36 (HR) on connections (137)
Is pin (B3) (HB) (wiring side) in short to
(wiring side) in short to ground?
ground?
YES
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN2--36 (HB)
Remove the rear left--hand wheel.
on connections (137) and pin (B3) (HB) on
connection (177).
on the sensor and pin (B3) (HB) on con-
nection (177).
Replace the ECM.
(Speed sensor wiring Aa)
61
0,5 HB
0,5 VN
FAULT CODE 69
ECM PIN REFERENCE
171
FAULT CODE 69
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 71 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER UNABLE TO CHANGE POSITION

DURING START UP.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the ECM will attempt to change position of the F/R Synchronizer each time
the key switch is turned to the “ON” or to the “START” position. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Hi-Lo (forward)
position when it is shifted toward rear of tractor. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Shuttle (reverse position when
it is shifted toward front of tractor.
Conditions:
• The ECM is unable to change the position of the F/R Synchronizer within 30 seconds after the tractor has
been started.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer Shift Piston in Power Shuttle Control Valve.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer shift rail or fork.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) or Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switches (T and S).
• Faulty Temperature Sensor, (Transmission oil temperature too cold.)
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 or 6 are not within range.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27” or “d28”.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled; if oil temperature is OK, (above 0_C/32_F), this error could correct itself after the
F/R Synchronizer has been successfully shifted into a different position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 71

Replace the two synchroniser position sensor
pushbuttons (HI -- LO and Shuttle).
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1000 rpm.

Disconnect the synchroniser solenoid valves
(Shuttle/HI--LO) and the two relative synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons.
Using an external battery, alternately power--up
the two Shuttle and HI -- LO solenoid valves.
Using a digital tester, check that the synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons are pressed alter-
nately.
(560 Ω pushbutton pressed, 2.7 kΩ pushbutton re-
leased).
YES
Check the synchroniser unit and the relative hy-

draulic system to eliminate the cause of the fault.
FAULT CODE 72 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DISENGAGED FROM POSITION.

manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the ECM will attempt to change position of the F/R Synchronizer each time
the key switch is turned to the “ON” or to the “START” position. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Hi-Lo (forward)
position when it is shifted toward rear of tractor. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Shuttle (reverse position when
it is shifted toward front of tractor.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a change in the position of the F/R Synchronizer without a command from the PS FNR
Lever.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer Shift Piston in Power Shuttle Control Valve.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer shift rail or fork.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) or Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switches (T and S).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 or 6 are not within range.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27” or “d28”.
Effects:
Transmission will only operate in the previous shuttle direction.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 72

Replace the two synchroniser position sensor
pushbuttons (HI -- LO and Shuttle).
YES

Disconnect the synchroniser solenoid valves
(Shuttle/HI--LO) and the two relative synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons.
Using an external battery, alternately power--up
the two Shuttle and HI -- LO solenoid valves.
Using a digital tester, check that the two synchro-
niser position sensor pushbuttons are pressed al-
ternately.
(560 Ω pushbutton pressed, 2.7 kΩ pushbutton re-
leased).
YES
Check the synchroniser unit and the relative hy-

draulic system to eliminate the cause of the fault.
FAULT CODE 73 – ECM (2) SUPPLY VOLTAGE (12VF) IS TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• When tractor is on, ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 34 or ECM connector 2, pin 10
is above 18 volts for longer that 0.3 seconds.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
• Overcharged Battery.
Tests:
• H9, channel 3, is above 762.
Effects:
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor). Dump solenoid stays energized. Indicator lights will not illuminate when key switch is in the “ON” or
“Start” position. ECM stops sending diagnostic pulses to the sensors, switches, or solenoids. This error will
automatically clear when voltage dropped below 16 volts
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 73

Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 rpm. Check the recharging system and re-
NO place the alternator if the voltage is
Using a digital tester, measure the battery voltage.
Is the voltage ∼ 14V? much higher than +14 V.
YES
Replace the ECM (1).
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 74 – ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (12VF) IS TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• When tractor is on, ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 34 or ECM connector 2, pin 10
is below 9 volts for longer that 0.3 seconds.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
• Undercharged Battery.
Tests:
• H9, channel 3, is below 428.
Effects:
tractor). Dump solenoid stays energized. Indicator lights will not illuminate when key switch is in the “ON” or
“Start” position. ECM stops sending diagnostic pulses to the sensors, switches, or solenoids. This error will
automatically clear when voltage raises above 9 volts.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 74

Remove the left--hand panel located under the
dashboard. NO Replace the fuse.
Fuse F16 (5A) Does it work?
YES

(137) on the ECM. Check the wiring between connec-
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO tions (137) and the fusebox and elim-
Between pin CN2--10 (MN) and pin CN2--34 (MN) inate the cause of the open circuit.
on connections (137) and ground, is the reading
+12V?
YES
Replace the ECM.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 76 – ECM TRIPLICATE READ ERROR IN THE NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM).
Conditions:
• It is impossible to recall any data from the NVM because all three stored copies are different.
Causes:
• Damaged Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) micro-chip.
• Faulty ECM (1).
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; ECM will re-set to default settings. The tractor performance may be affected in the
area where setting have been changed to improve characteristics, (H2, H3, H6, H7, & HE). The ECM will try
to store any self learned or collected data when tractor is shut down.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 76
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 77 – INTERNAL ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (8V) IS TOO HIGH.

NOTE: This pin is not used externally as an actual output. This is a internal print board circuit error.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 35 is above 8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty ECM (1).
• ECM connector 2, pin 35 is/was shorted by an external 12 volt source.
• Internal circuit short to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 77
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 78 – INTERNAL ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (8V) IS TOO LOW.

NOTE: This pin is not used externally as an actual output. This is a internal print board circuit error.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 35 is below 8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty ECM (1).
• ECM connector 2, pin 35 is/was shorted to an external ground or 5 volt source.
• Internal circuit short to ground.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 78
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 81 – TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a short to ground or open between Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM connector2,
pin 31.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Transmission Pressure
Switch, or between the switch terminals, or between the Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM
connector2, pin 31. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Transmission Pressure Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; transmission oil pressure information is not available. During the first 30 seconds
of start up, the pressure switch reaches a pressure above 11 bar (160 psi), a signal is sent from the ECM
to the dump solenoid, allowing the clutch packs to engage. If this doesn’t happen within 30 seconds the error
is registered. If the error is present and oil temperature is above 0_(32_F) the transmission is still operational.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 81

NO Connect the connections.
valves unit guard.
Are the pressure switch connections connected?
YES
Disconnect the pressure switch and the dump so-

lenoid valve connections.
NO Replace the pressure switch.
Using a digital tester, check: is the pressure switch
normally closed?
YES
YES
Start the engine.
Check the hydraulic system.
Using a digital tester, check: does the pressure NO NO
Is the oil pressure ∼ 16 bar (232 psi)?
switch open?
YES
Check the hydraulic system.

Is there electrical continuity between wire (AB) on Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
the pressure switch connection and pin (C6) (AB) cause of the open circuit.
on connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between wire (SN) on

the pressure switch connection and pin (B4) (SN) NO
on connection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECM.
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN2--31 NO
(SN) on connections (137) and pin (B4) (SN) on
connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN2--20

(AB) on connections (137) and pin (C6) (AB) on NO
connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECM.

FAULT CODE 81
ECM PIN REFERENCE
172
FAULT CODE 81
1 ZB (18)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11) 137A
0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36) 1 SN (31)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10)
0.5 LR (9)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
0.5 MB (1)
1 AB (C6)
1 AR (C8)
69
177
1 ZB (B8)
1 BR (A8)
1 AN (B7)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 82 – TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SHORT

TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a short to 5 or 12 volts between Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM connector2, pin
31.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Transmission Pressure Switch,
or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between the Transmission Pressure switch and
ECM connector2, pin 31. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to
12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Transmission Pressure Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; transmission oil pressure information is not available. During the first 30 seconds
of start up, the pressure switch reaches a pressure above 11 bar (160 psi), a signal is sent from the ECM
to the dump solenoid, allowing the clutch packs to engage. If this doesn’t happen within 30 seconds the error
is registered. If the error is present and oil temperature is above 0_(32_F) the transmission is still operational.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 82

valves unit guard. NO Replace pressure switch.
Disconnect the pressure switch connections.
Are wires (AB) and (SN) in short circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between the pressure switch con-

nections, pin (C6) (AB) and (B4) (SN) on connec-
tion (177) and pins CN2--20 (AB) and CN2--31 (SN)
on connections (137) on the ECM.
FAULT CODE 82
ECM PIN REFERENCE
173
FAULT CODE 82
1 ZB (18)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11) 137A
0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36) 1 SN (31)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10)
0.5 LR (9)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
0.5 MB (1)
1 AB (C6)
1 AR (C8)
69
177
1 ZB (B8)
1 BR (A8)
1 AN (B7)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
POWER SHUTTLE (16 + 16) ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT

WIRING DIAGRAM
1 Starter switch. 1a: starter function -- 1b: gear function.

2 Starter relay.
3 Shuttle control lever. 3a: on engine starting circuit -- 3b: on power supply control unit circuit.
4 Clutch pedal switch for engine starting circuit.
5 Clutch pedal switch for power supply control unit circuit.
6 Transmission oil pressure sensor indicator light.
8 Transmission alarm indicator light.
9 Clutch A (forward gears) solenoid valve.
10 Clutch B (forward gears) solenoid valve (reverse gears).
13 Dump solenoid valve (hydraulic neutral safety).
14 Parking brake ON output signal, for acoustic alarm.
15 Shuttle lever output signal (to FWD control unit) if reverse gear is selected.
16 Speed sensor amplified signal to instrument panel.
17 Bodywork ground.
18 Sensors ground.
19 Power ground.
20 Connection for Diagnostic Testers.
21 Pushbutton Y.
22 Pushbutton B.
23 HMENU selection pushbutton.
24 Calibration and Diagnostic Unit or Electrical Service Tool.
25 Speed sensor.
26 Engine revs sensor (from alternator).
27 Parking brake ON switch.
28 Range position sensor switch (G1).
29 Transmission oil pressure for control unit activation.
30 Speed shift position sensor switch (C1).
33 To fuse 15.
34 Driving seat safety switch.
35 Transmission oil temperature sensor.
38 Shuttle lever in reverse gears selection position.
39 Shuttle lever in forward gears selection position.
40 Clutch pedal potentiometer signal.
41 Sensors power supply (+5V).
42 Emergency cable for “limp home” after electrics breakdown.
43 Battery.
POWER SHUTTLE ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM (16 + 16)
2 FUSE 16 (5A)
1a
3a 4 5
3b
FUSE 14 (5A)
6
41
FUSE 7 (10A)
FUSE 9 (10A)
40
FUSE 15 (5A)
8
FUSE 7 (10A)
1b 39
38 9
43
10
NTC 1140 a 0o -- 330 a 40o
35
34
42
33
9
13
30
14
10
29
SW--3
CN2--31
15
28 SW--3 CN2--31
27
16
24
26
680
23
25
22 21 19 18 17
20
MPD2821A

Linked PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Linked PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Linked PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REPAIR

TN60DA TN60SA MANUAL

SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

SECTION 55 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

366 -- 4/04 ã 2004 CNH America LLC

Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Transmission (16 x 16) Synchro-Command

Section Description Page

21 000 Main data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical type with spur

C1 -- 20 to 25 Nm C3 -- 117 to 129 Nm C4 -- 280 to 309 Nm C5 -- 43 to 51 Nm

25614 C8 -- 117 to 129 Nm C7 -- 43 to 51 Nm

380001618 Driving shaft installation guide.

Make in Fe 42 C material -- (*) Measurement according to hoist seat.

Bracket to be made for gearbox overhaul on rotating stand

Make in Fe 42C material.

1. Seal. 8. Bevel pinion shaft.

NOTE: On assembly apply sealing compound to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

Cross--sectional view of gearbox and range gear

1. Shuttle control external rod. 4. Gear selector internal rod.

NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 30.

1. Gearbox clutch control pedal. 3. Gearbox clutch control external lever.

GEARBOX, GEAR RANGE AND SHUTTLE TROUBLESHOOTING

Problems Possible causes Remedies

Spontaneous disengagement of 1. Levers and relay rods Adjust correctly.

2. Control levers retaining Replace springs.

3. Synchronizer teeth or Remove the transmission--gearbox

4. Engagement stroke Eliminate the cause and reset the

Problems Possible causes Remedies

2. Stiffness and/or partial seizure Check rod pivots and lubricate.

3. Main clutch drag. See Section 18.

4. Synchronizers or selection Remove the transmission--gearbox

5. Internal control elements do Overhaul the controls.

Excessive noise in gearbox or 1. Internal components worn or Remove the transmission--gearbox

and left hand wheels. 10

-- Before installing boxes, supports and covers, 25657

1. Fix the gearbox--transmission casing to the rotat-

2. Remove the drive gear casing, following the in-

3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the

4. Detach the power take--off control shaft following

5. Remove the parking brake casing cover and ex-

NOTE: If the gearbox in question is a standard fitting,

28. To install the transmission--gearbox casing, pro-

-- Respect the tightening torques prescribed on

-- Carry out the gearbox driven and driving shaft

-- Install the gearbox driving shaft on the relative

-- Install the gearbox driven gear on the relative

-- Install the reverse drive gear complete with thrust

-- Assemble the synchronizer and circlip.

-- Install the reverser control rod, fork and stop cir-

-- Assemble the driven and driving shafts, the con-

-- Install the control forks to the rods using the pins.

-- Detach the mobile part of the tool 380001614 and

-- Install tools 380001618 and 380001619 (1) on

-- Install the lubrication union and sleeve.

-- Install the lubrication pressure adjustment valve,

-- Assemble the lubrication pipes.

-- Install the driven shaft and gears. 57